Skip to main content

Full text of "Mechano-therapeutics in general practice"

See other formats


Jfrimtg  S 


**##* 
<9fstJCitU!| 


MECHANO-THERAPEUTICS 
IN   GENERAL   PRACTICE 


f*lT 
J7 


MECHANO-TH  ERAPEUTICS 
IN  GENERAL  PRACTICE 


BY 


G.  de  SWIETOGHOWSKI,  M.D.,  M.R.G.S. 

FELLOW   OF   THE   ROYAL  SOCIETY   OF  MEDICINE 

CLINICAL  ASSISTANT,    ELECTKICAL   AND  MASSAGE   DEPARTMENT 

KINO'S  COLLEGE   HOSPITAL 


WITH   31   ILLUSTRATIONS 


LONDON 

H,   K.   LEWIS,   136  GOWER  STREET,  W.CJ. 
1914 


TO   MY   WIFE 


PREFACE 

THERE  is,  unfortunately,  still  a  barrier  between  a  large 
number  of  men  in  general  practice,  and  the  application 
of  mechano- therapeutics  :  the  object  of  this  book  will 
be  to  break  down  this  barrier. 

The  main  reason  for  the  indifference  on  the  part  of 
medical  men  with  regard  to  this  important  adjuvant 
in  therapy  is  probably  their  ignorance  of  it,  which  is 
largely  due  to  the  fact  that  this  subject  is  not  compulsory 
in  the  curriculum,  and  is  altogether  neglected  by  the 
medical  schools.  So  that  if  there  is  any  knowledge  of 
it  among  the  profession  in  general,  it  is  only  owing 
to  the  industry  and  pluck  of  a  few  individuals  who 
freed  themselves  from  the  "  recognised "  ideas  and 
theories. 

The  fact  that  in  the  past  the  carrying  out  of  these 
"  unapproved  "  methods  largely  rested  in  the  hands 
of  scientifically  untrained  people,  naturally  helped  to 
bring  into  discredit  everything  that  was  connected 
with  them.  Though  a  great  watchfulness  in  dealing 
with  a  new  "  cure  "  is  always  necessary  on  our  part, 
yet  it  appears  that  a  passive  attitude  of  the  profession 
towards  mechano-therapy  only  results  in  losses  to  the 

vii 


viii  PREFACE 

doctors  as  well  as  to  their  patients,  leaving,  as  usual,  a 
tertius  gaudens — the  quack. 

Attempts  will  be  made  in  the  following  pages  to 
point  out  where  mechano-therapy  is  likely  to  prove 
useful ;  a  word  will  also  be  said  about  the  technique. 
My  leading  idea  will  be  to  make  the  whole  concise  and 
clear,  that  it  should  serve  as  a  practical  guide  to  massage 
in  general  practice. 

THE  AUTHOR. 


NEW  CAVENDISH  STREET, 
LONDON,  W., 
June,  1914. 


CONTENTS 

PAGE 

PREFACE vii 

GENERAL  CONSIDERATIONS         ....  1 

INDICATIONS  AND  CONTRA-INDICATIONS      .         .  3 

I.  SURGICAL .  5 

A.    FRACTURES  .         .         .         ...  5 

THE  UPPER  EXTREMITY        .         .         .12 

Clavicle 12 

Humerus       .....  14 

Shoulder 14 

Elbow 19 

Wrist  (Colles)          ....  21 

Metacarpals  .....  24 

Fingers 24 

THE  LOWER  EXTREMITY       ...  27 

Femur 27 

Patella 29 

Leg 32 

Ankle  (Pott)           .         .                   .  34 

Metatarsals 39 

Toes 40 

ix 


CONTENTS 

PAGE 

B.  SPRAINED  JOINTS  AND  DISLOCATIONS      .  41 

Shoulder 42 

Elbow 43 

Wrist 43 

Hip 44 

Knee 44 

Ankle 45 

C.  CHRONIC  ARTHRITIC  CONDITIONS    .         .  47 

Osteo-arthritis 47 

Traumatic  synovitis      ....  47 

Teno-synovitis      .....  48 

D.  INJURIES  TO  SOFT  PARTS      ...  48 
Contusions  ......  48 

Sprains       .          .          ....  50 

E.  CHRONIC  INFLAMMATORY  CONDITIONS  OF 

SOFT  PARTS      .....  50 

Muscular  rheumatism  (Fibrositis)    .          .  50 

Torticollis 52 

Lumbago     ......  52 

Sciatica        ......  52 

Ulcers 53 

Bed-sores     ......  54 

Catarrhal  prostatitis      ....  54 

F.  DEFORMITIES 55 

Scoliosis 55 

Kyphosis  (Round  shoulders)  ...  67 

Genu  valgum  and  genu  varum        .          .  68 

Flat  feet 70 

Wry-neck 73 

Sprengel's  shoulder       ,  74 


CONTENTS  xi 

PAGE 

II.  MEDICAL     . 75 

A.  CIRCULATORY  SYSTEM   ....       76 

B.  RESPIRATORY  SYSTEM  .  .87 
Hypostatic  pneumonia            .                    .       88 
Chronic  bronchitis,  etc.           ...       89 
Catarrhal  laryngitis  and  pharyngitis        .       90 

C.  DIGESTIVE  SYSTEM        ....       92 

Gastrectasis 93 

Constipation         .....       94 

D.  CONSTITUTIONAL  DISEASES    ...  99 

Gout 99 

Diabetes 99 

Adiposity 99 

Debility       .         .         .  .         .102 

Anaemia       ......  102 

Rickets 102 

E.  URINARY  SYSTEM          ....     103 

F.  NERVOUS  SYSTEM          ....     104 

ORGANIC 105 

1 .  Locomotor  ataxia       .         .         .105 

2.  Progressive  muscular  atrophy      .  108 

3.  Acute  anterior  polio-myelitis        .  109 

4.  Cerebral  haemorrhage           .         .  112 

5.  Neuritis 114 

6.  Lesions  of  the  peripheral  nerves  .  115 

(a)  Cerebral  nerves  .         .     115 

(6)  Spinal  nerves     .         .         .117 

7.  Neuralgia  .          .          .          .118 


xii  CONTENTS 

PAGE 

F.  NERVOUS  SYSTEM — Contd. 

FUNCTIONAL 122 

1.  Paralysis  agitans        .         .         .122 

2.  Chorea      .         .         .  .123 

3.  Occupation  neuroses .         .         .124 

4.  Hysteria  and  neurasthenia .         .125 

III.  SPECIAL 127 

A.  GYNECOLOGICAL  AND  OBSTETRICAL        .     127 

B.  OTOLOGICAL  AND  OPHTHALMOLOGICAL      .     130 

C.  RHINO-  AND  LARYNGOLOGICAL         .         .131 

D.  DERMATOLOGICAL 133 

E.  DENTAL 133 

CONCLUDING  REMARKS      .         .         .         .         .135 

REFERENCES 137 

INDEX      .  1 39 


LIST   OF   ILLUSTRATIONS 


FIQ. 

1.  STROKING  (EFFLEURAGE)  .  .         9 

2.  KNEADING  (PINCHING,  PETBISSAGE)    .          .         .15 

3.  KNEADING  (GRASPING)      .          .          .          .          .16 

4.  HACKING  (TAPOTEMENT)  .          .          .          .          .16 
5  and  6.  A  CASE  or  VOLKMANN'S  ISCH^EMIC  CON- 

TRACTTJRE    OF   THE    HAND          .  .  .      facing    20 

7.  FRICTION  (DEEP  KNEADING)     .          .          .          .23 

8.  PASSIVE  PRONATION  AND  SUPINATION        .          .       23 

9.  CENTRIPETAL  STROKING  OF  FINGERS          .         .       25 

10.  STROKING  (EFFLEURAGE)  OF  THIGH  ...       30 

11.  MOBILISATION  OF  THE  PATELLA         .          .         .31 

12.  PASSIVE  MOBILISATION  OF  THE  FOOT  IN  FRAC- 

TURES OF  THE  LEG       .....       33 

13  and  14.  A  CASE  OF  FRACTURE  OF  THE  TIBIA      .       34 

15.  MASSAGE  OF  THE  ANKLES         .         .         .         .36 

16.  TIP-TOEING      .......       37 

17.  A  CASE  OF  A  TREBLE  FRACTURE  OF  THE  ANKLE       39 

18  and  19.  A  CASE  OF  SUBCORACOID  DISLOCATION  OF 
THE  SHOULDER,  AND  FRACTURE  OF  THE 
TUBEROSITIES  ....  facing  42,  43 


xiv  LIST   OF   ILLUSTRATIONS 

FIG.  PAGE 

20.  FORCIBLE  KNEADING  OF  THE  ELBOW  REGION    .       51 

21.  KNEADING  OF  THE  TRAPEZITJS  .          .          .57 

22.  A  CASE  OF  POSTUBAL  RIGHT  DORSAL  CURVATURE 

facing  60 

23.  "  SITTING  SIDE  BENDING,"  WITH  PRESSURE  ON 

THE  CONVEXITY   .....    facing  60 

24.  "  SITTING  FORWARD  BENDING  "        .          .          .61 

25.  BREATHING  EXERCISES  IN  LYING      ...       66 

26.  WALKING  ON  THE  OUTER  BORDER  OF  THE  FEET  .       71 

27.  WRIST  ROLLING       ......       82 

28  and  29.  NECK  MASSAGE.     STROKING  .          .  90-91 

30.  NECK  MASSAGE.     SAWING  MOVEMENTS       .          .      117 

31.  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  ORBIT  IN  HEADACHE       .     120 


MECHANO-THERAPEUTICS 
IN  GENERAL  PRACTICE 

GENERAL   CONSIDERATIONS 

IT  is,  perhaps,  wiser  to  start  with  the  description  of 
clinical  conditions  calling  for  the  application  of  mechano- 
therapeutics  right  away,  than  to  follow  the  usual  way 
of  describing  all  the  manipulations  first.  The  under- 
standing of  those  seemingly  occult  and  mysterious 
performances  will  become  much  easier  when  described 
in  connection  with  the  complaints  which  they  are 
intended  to  remedy.  This  will  avoid  the  meaningless 
explanations  at  the  beginning  of  most  books  on  this 
subject  of  such  terms  as  effleurage  and  petrissage. 

Following  the  general  rule  adopted  in  medicine,  the 
disorders  will  be  divided  into  medical,  surgical,  and 
special.  This  classification  has  been  chosen  as  one 
to  which  every  medical  man  has  become  accustomed 
through  his  hospital  training.  The  following  up  of 
this  method  will  facilitate  the  reading,  as  well  as  the 
exposition  of  the  wide  and  manifold  application  of 
massage,  and  thus  it  will  not  be  necessary  to  create  a 
new  system  of  pathology  in  order  to  do  it  justice. 
1 


2  GENERAL   CONSIDERATIONS 

To  comfort  those  who  think  many  costly  appliances 
necessary  to  carry  out  this  kind  of  treatment,  I  can 
only  say  that  here,  as  well  as  anywhere  else,  the  best 
results  are  achieved  by  few  and  simple  means.  We 
must  always  remember  that  the  treatment  has  often 
to  be  administered  in  private  houses  under  great  diffi- 
culties. A  couch  and  a  pair  of  skilful  hands  are  all 
that  is  really  indispensable  :  they  are  as  important 
in  mechano-therapy  as  in  operative  surgery.  We  often 
prefer  our  own  fingers  to  the  most  wonderful  instru- 
ments. 

Skill  is  required  everywhere.  But  the  skill  of  an 
average  medical  man  is  quite  sufficient  to  start  with, 
if  shyness  could  only  be  overcome.  Those  who  play 
the  piano  or  the  violin  will  find  it  a  useful  talent 
in  this  respect  too.  Those  who  cannot  rely  on  their 
fingers  should  leave  massage  alone  altogether,  rather 
than  have  recourse  to  vibrators,  pulsators,  and  other 
similar  instruments.  It  is  infinitely  more  difficult  to 
know  what  we  are  doing  when  we  are  applying  a  motor, 
which  is  always  a  clumsy,  irresponsive  object,  than  when 
employing  our  fingers  alone.  Those  of  the  profession 
who  have  some  experience  in  trephining  will,  no  doubt, 
agree  on  this  point.  But  here,  as  well  as  there,  machines 
render  great  services  in  experienced  and  reliable  hands. 
They  also  save  a  great  deal  of  energy  to  those  who 
have  to  do  this  kind  of  work  during  the  best  part  of 
the  day.  There  is  such  a  variety  of  vibrators  that  no 
one  ought  to  experience  the  slightest  difficulty  in  satis- 
fying his  taste. 

With  regard  to  the  couch,  it  is  advisable  to  have  it 


GENERAL  CONSIDERATIONS  5 

not  too  low,  and,  if  possible,  covered  with  some  rough 
material,  such  as  plush.  This  prevents  the  patient 
sliding  about,  and  it  feels  warmer.  Leather  or  its 
imitations  are  less  suitable  as  covering  materials, 
because  they  are  cold,  and  rather  unpleasant  for  the 
patient.  One  or  two  hard  cushions  complete  the 
necessary  outfit. 

No  lubricants  are  really  important  in  massage.  They 
do  not  reduce  the  pain,  if  it  is  the  want  of  skill  that 
causes  it.  I  should  only  advise  their  use  in  very  rare 
cases  in  which  the  skin  is  very  sore. 

Those  who  visit  Sweden,  the  motherland  of  gymnastics 
and  massage,  will  be  surprised  at  the  simplicity  of  most 
of  the  mechano- therapeutic  institutes  of  Stockholm. 
And  yet  the  best  work  is  supposed  (rightly  or  wrongly) 
to  be  done  there. 

INDICATIONS 

On  the  whole  :  injuries,  such  as  fractures  and  sprains, 
deformities,  simple  and  chronic  inflammatory  conditions, 
and  constitutional  diseases,  are  those  in  which  mechano- 
therapy  will  be  found  useful,  and  in  most  cases  more 
helpful  than  any  of  our  drugs.  The  use  of  drugs, 
however,  is  never  incompatible  with  massage,  and  the 
two  can  be  safely  combined. 

CONTRA-INDICATIONS 

No  acute  inflammatory  conditions  and  no  tumours 
should  ever  be  directly  treated  by  massage.  Tumours 


4  COKTRA-INDICATIONS 

include  here  all  the  types  of  granulomata,  such  as 
syphilis,  tuberculosis,  and  actinomycosis,  as  well  as  the 
true  forms  of  new-growths,  benign  as  well  as  malignant. 
Rest,  the  knife  or  some  other  applications,  are  still  the 
best  remedies  here,  in  spite  of  the  attempts  of  some 
enthusiasts  to  regard  massage  as  a  panacea  for  all 
complaints.  The  latter  practice  will  always  bring  into 
disrepute  methods  otherwise  very  useful. 

Hcemophilia,  leukaemia,  and  aneurysm  also  belong  to 
this  category. 


I.  SURGICAL 

A.  FRACTURES 

FRACTURES  of  the  limbs  are  the  only  class  of  fractures 
that  may  become  subject  to  mechano-therapeutic 
treatment.  Fractures  of  the  skull,  the  vertebral  column, 
and  those  of  the  pelvis  are  either  fatal  in  most  cases 
or  heal  best  under  absolute  rest,  which  is  imperative  with 
regard  to  the  important  organs  that  might  be  injured. 
Once  satisfactorily  united,  they  are  not  likely  to  leave 
any  such  undesirable  traces  which  could  have  been 
prevented.  These  fractures  are  also  comparatively 
rare,  and  are  mostly  treated  in  hospitals  or  nursing- 
homes,  therefore  they  do  not  concern  us  here. 

On  the  other  hand,  anybody,  however  little  acquainted 
with  general  practice,  will  find  sufficient  reason  to  com- 
plain about  the  bad  results  of  some  of  the  commoner 
fractures  of  the  extremities.  Anybody  will  recall  to 
his  memory  some  case  of  Pott's  or  Colles's  fracture  he 
has  recently  met  with,  which  he  could  not  cure  by  any 
means. 

Most  of  these  cases  might  have  taken  an  entirely 

5 


6  FRACTURES 

different  course  if  properly  seen  to  from  the  first.  These 
patients  so  often  complain  about  pain  and  stiffness  long 
after  the  time  considered  necessary  for  the  broken  bone 
to  regain  its  continuity  and  its  former  strength  had 
passed,  that  in  most  cases  the  injured  limbs  remain 
quite  useless  for  another  month  or  two,  or  even  longer. 

The  fault  lies  in  the  old-fashioned  method  of  putting 
up  all  kinds  of  fractures  in  splints,  and  leaving  them 
to  their  own  fate,  once  a  satisfactory  apposition  of 
the  fragments  had  been  achieved.  We  all  know  that 
an  accurate  position  of  the  bone  fragments  does  not 
always  guarantee  subsequent  free  use  of  the  limb,  and 
I  have  seen  limbs  that  were  crippled  in  spite  of  the 
radiographs  showing  perfect  results.  The  fixation 
method,  though,  perhaps,  more  convenient  in  the  be- 
ginning, will  nearly  always  cause  disappointment  after 
a  few  weeks. 

Fractures  are  becoming  less  and  less  a  noli  me  tangere. 
A  treatment  which  was  taboo  not  so  very  long  ago  is 
now  making  its  way  through  the  world.  Two  great 
surgeons,  Championniere  in  France,  and  Bennett  in 
this  country,  were  amongst  the  first  pioneers  of  the 
new  movement.  They  were  soon  to  realise  the  import- 
ance of  the  early  application  of  massage  and  movements 
in  the  management  of  fractures. 

The  main  object  of  the  new  treatment  is  to  prevent 
stiffness  and  pain,  the  two  remote  symptoms  of  all 
fractures,  which  are  both  so  tedious  in  practice.  The 
way  in  which  these  complications  arise  is  a  very  natural 
and  simple  one  ;  and  so  is  also  the  way  in  which  they 
may  be  prevented.  What  we  really  aim  at  is  the 


FRACTURES  7 

dispersion  of  the  extra vasated  blood,  since  it  is  the 
hcematoma  that  afterwards  causes  the  unpleasant 
results. 

Blood  naturally  becomes  organised  and  replaced  by 
connective  tissue.  Ligaments,  muscles,  tendon- sheaths, 
and  joint-capsules,  in  fact,  any  structure,  become  hard 
and  inelastic  from  excess  of  scar-tissue.  Our  chief 
object,  therefore,  must  be  to  hasten  the  absorption 
of  the  extravasated  material  by  driving  it  into  the 
lymphatics.  In  that  way  we  shall  also  improve  the 
circulation  in  the  peripheral  parts  of  the  injured  limb, 
which  so  often  suffer  from  imperfect  blood-supply, 
caused  partly  by  the  swelling  at  the  site  of  the  fracture, 
and  partly  by  splints  and  bandages. 

It  is  a  well-known  fact  that  the  joints  and  tendon- 
sheaths  in  the  neighbourhood  of  fractures,  though  not 
actually  involved  in  the  injury,  swell  and  form  effusions, 
which  are  often  followed  by  great  discomfort,  thus 
complicating  the  situation  still  more.  This  symptom, 
however,  is  frequently  overlooked  at  the  time  of  its 
occurrence,  and  is  only  noticed  when  the  patient  begins 
to  complain  of  pain  at  an  unexpected  place. 

The  following  lines  contain  a  general  plan  of  treatment 
of  all  fractures.  Perfect  reduction,  being  of  first  import- 
ance for  the  subsequent  results,  should  be  insisted  upon 
in  every  case  where  there  is  any  displacement  at  all. 
When  a  fracture  is  seen  on  the  first  day,  and  there  is 
present  a  sufficient  amount  of  displacement  of  the 
fragments  to  necessitate  reduction,  this  may  be  found 
impossible  without  an  anaesthetic,  owing  to  muscular 
spasm  and  pain.  In  such  a  case  one  should  always 


8  FRACTURES 

try  to  relieve  the  spasm  by  means  of  very  gentle 
(centripetal)  stroking  carried  out  over  the  contracted 
muscles.  One  will  find  that  such  manipulations  have 
a  remarkably  soothing  effect  on  the  patient,  and  often 
render  the  administration  of  anaesthetics  quite  un- 
necessary. The  spasmodically  contracted  muscles  be- 
come relaxed,  and  the  pain,  which  to  a  great  extent 
is  caused  by  the  cramp,  is  markedly  diminished.  If 
now  the  attempt  to  reduce  the  fracture  be  repeated, 
it  will  be  found  considerably  easier. 

In  order  to  achieve  a  complete  relaxation  of  muscles, 
massage  has  to  be  applied  for  at  least  fifteen  to  twenty 
minutes.  The  limb  is  then  placed  on  a  splint,  preferably 
a  removable  one,  which  would  permit  of  an  easy  and 
frequent  access.  As  soon  as  the  swelling  has  ceased 
to  increase,  which  generally  happens  on  the  second  or 
third  day,  by  which  time  the  shock  has  also  subsided, 
the  splints  are  taken  off  and  the  limb  submitted  to 
regular  massage. 

Care  must  be  taken  to  avoid  displacement.  The 
limb  should  be  placed  on  a  flat  surface  :  the  leg  on  a 
bed,  and  the  arm  on  a  table.  A  hard  mattress  on  the 
former,  and  a  cushion  on  the  latter,  will  suffice  to 
diminish  the  pain  without  favouring  the  displacement. 

Gentle  upward  stroking  of  the  skin  above  and  below 
the  site  of  the  fracture  will  have  to  be  applied  in  all 
cases,  and  it  is  carried  out  with  both  palms  alternately. 
The  parts  in  contact  with  the  patient  are  the  thenar, 
hypothenar  and  the  palmar  surfaces  of  the  thumbs  and 
fingers,  which  all  try  to  embrace  the  limb  (Fig.  1). 
There  ought  to  be  as  little  pressure  exercised  as  possible, 


FRACTURES  9 

the  movement  being  more  a  gliding  than  a  pressing  one. 
The  aim  of  stroking  is  only  to  empty  the  superficial 
veins  and  lymphatics  in  the  vicinity  of  the  extra vasated 


FIG.  1. — STROKING  (EFFLEUKAGE). 


In  this  and  the  following  diagrams  the  supporting 
cushion  has  been  omitted,  so  as  not  to  obstruct  the 
view  of  the  limbs. 

blood.  The  fluid  follows  the  negative  pressure  thus 
created  in  the  blood-vessels,  and  becomes  sucked  in  and 
pressed  out.  This,  however,  does  not  in  any  way  in- 
crease the  discomfort  of  the  patient,  as  the  actual 
site  of  the  fracture  is  left  untouched.  On  the  con- 
trary, by  reducing  the  tension  in  the  tissues,  it 
diminishes  the  pain  very  markedly.  If  done  skilfully, 
this  stroking  may  be  carried  out  from  the  very  day 
of  the  injury,  and  should  be  given  for  about  fifteen  to 
twenty  minutes,  at  the  rate  of  about  twenty  strokings 
a  minute,  which  roughly  corresponds  to  the  breathing 
rate  of  a  normal  person.  The  first  few  days  the 
treatment  should  consist  of  this  and  nothing  else  ; 
movements  of  the  limb  might  easily  produce  a  new 
hsematoma. 

After  each  application  of  massage  the  splints  have  to 
be  put  back  into  their  original  position.  The  more 
extensive  the  primary  swelling  was,  and  the  bigger  the 


10  FRACTURES 

part  in  which  the  fracture  occurred,  the  longer  has  this 
mild  and  expectant  treatment  to  be  carried  out.  Where, 
however,  the  dimensions  are  smaller,  another  point 
frequently  arises  which  necessitates  an  early  introduc- 
tion of  movements  into  the  scheme.  This  is  the  im- 
portance of  preserving  a  good  function  in  places  where 
stiffness  is  very  likely  to  occur.  The  hands  and  feet, 
and  joints  in  general,  when  directly  involved  into  the 
injury,  require  from  the  beginning  a  more  energetic 
treatment  than  a  fracture  through  the  middle  of  the 
humerus  or  of  the  femur. 

The  presence  of  tendon- sheaths,  joints,  and  ligaments 
near  a  fracture  calls  for  an  early  application  of  passive 
movements  in  addition  to  stroking.  Adhesions,  which  in 
the  first  few  days  consist  of  fibrin  alone,  are  thereby 
broken  down  and  not  allowed  to  become  fibrous.  I 
need  hardly  add  that  before  the  consolidation  of  frag- 
ments has  taken  place,  all  these  manipulations  must 
be  carried  out  by  the  surgeon  himself,  and  no  one  else. 
Otherwise  there  will  be  always  a  great  danger  of  a 
displacement,  which  might  be  easily  overlooked  and 
neglected.  The  surgeon  must  be  positively  sure  of  the 
good  position  of  the  fragments  each  time  he  reapplies 
the  splints.  Should  a  slip  have  occurred  during  the 
daily  manipulations,  it  is  corrected  without  delay ; 
and  only  a  surgeon  can  decide  whether  the  bones  are 
in  the  proper  position  or  not. 

When  available,  the  use  of  X-rays  facilitates  our 
task  considerably  :  a  radiograph  taken  before  and  after 
the  reduction,  and,  if  possible,  during  the  first  week 
or  ten  days,  helps  to  disperse  any  doubt  as  to  the 


FRACTURES  11 

satisfactory  progress  of  the  case.  This,  however,  being 
scarcely  practicable  in  general  practice,  must  necessarily 
become  limited  to  rare  cases  presenting  some  particular 
difficulties,  such  as  the  intra-articular  fractures. 

In  order  to  facilitate  the  return  of  venous  blood, 
fractured  limbs  should  be  kept  elevated  during  night- 
time, and  during  the  best  part  of  the  day  as  well.  The 
application  of  ice  and  other  cooling  substances,  specially 
near  the  joints,  is  not  advisable.  Some  authors  (Cham- 
pionniere)  go  so  far  as  to  make  this  even  responsible 
for  subsequent  chronic  arthritic  changes  in  the  joints, 
which  persist  long  after  all  the  traces  of  the  injury 
have  disappeared. 

Active  movements,  that  is  movements  carried  out  by 
the  patient  himself,  can  be  commenced  as  soon  as  the 
passive  ones,  that  is  those  which  are  carried  out  by 
the  surgeon,  have  become  easy  and  painless.  Active 
movements  are,  of  course,  begun  earlier  in  fractures 
close  to  joints,  such  as  the  ankles  or  the  ivrists,  but 
especially  in  such  parts  as  the  hands  and  feet.  Move- 
ments in  such  cases  have  to  be  carried  out  as  completely 
as  possible,  that  is  they  must  be  performed  within  their 
widest  range.  It  is  a  good  method  to  let  the  patient 
do  as  much  of  the  movement  as  he  is  able  to  actively, 
and  then  to  finish  off  every  movement  passively  until  its 
limit  is  reached.  This  will  easily  help  the  patient  to 
overcome  the  difficulties  of  performing  active  movements 
within  their  normal  range,  and  will  thus  prevent  the 
limitation  of  movements  frequently  resulting  in  these 
cases. 

Cases  in  which  a  wiring  or  plating  operation  has  been 


12  FRACTURES 

performed,  are  obviously  included  in  our  considera- 
tions, because  massage  can  and  should  be  carried  out 
in  these  cases  on  precisely  the  same  lines,  as  long  as 
the  wound  is  protected  from  contamination  by  a 
dressing.  The  results  of  these  operations  are  always 
much  more  brilliant  when  combined  with  mechano- 
therapeutic  measures  ;  all  the  secondary  stiffness  in 
joints  below  and  above  the  wired  bone  is  thus  easily 
prevented. 

__   A 

Ununited  fractures  are  equally  "more  often  benefited 
by  this  kind  of  treatment  than  not,  as  the  slight  friction 
exercised  at  both  ends  of  the  fragments  against  each 
other  largely  favours  the  formation  of  callus.  The 
effect  of  it  is  generally  seen  in  a  week  or  two.  This  is 
also  the  reason  why  fractured  ribs  unite  well,  non- 
union in  these  cases  being  almost  unknown.  Here 
the  fragments  are  kept  moving  by  the  respiratory 
movements.  The  same  applies  to  most  cases  of  frac- 
tured clavicle  if  there  is  not  too  much  displacement. 

Occasionally  rest  intervals  of  a  few  days,  interposed 
between  two  courses  of  massage,  are  found  useful,  when 
the  formation  of  callus  is  much  retarded. 

Passing  now  to  the  discussion  of  individual  fractures, 
we  shall  mainly  dwell  upon  the  commoner  types,  such 
as  are  more  likely  to  occur  in  general  practice. 


THE   UPPER   EXTREMITY 

Although  the  treatment  of  a  fractured  clavicle  does 
not  as  a  rule  offer  any  difficulty,  yet  the  period  of 
recovery  from  such  an  injury  is  often  unnecessarily 


THE   UPPER  EXTREMITY  13 

prolonged  by  the  stiffness  of  the  shoulder  joint.  This  is 
quite  intelligible  to  us,  and  must  always  be  expected 
after  a  few  weeks  of  fixation,  which  is  commonly 
practised. 

Instead  of  this,  the  arm  ought  to  be  moved  from  the 
first  day.  The  surgeon  should  steady  the  acromial 
fragment  of  the  clavicle  with  his  corresponding  hand, 
and  should  carry  out  slow  and  gentle  passive  movements, 
mainly  consisting  of  circumduction  in  the  shoulder  joint. 
The  arm  is  firmly  grasped  above  the  elbow  with  the 
other  hand. 

The  limb  is  fixed  for  the  rest  of  the  day  by  means  of 
a  strip  of  adhesive  plaster  or  a  bandage,  following 
Duncan's  or  Wharton's  method,  but  all  these  remedies 
are  discarded  after  a  few  days,  and  the  arm  is  supported 
by  a  sling  alone.  As  a  matter  of  course  the  strapping 
is  taken  off  every  day  to  permit  of  a  free  access  to  the 
shoulder  joint,  and  is  reapplied  afterwards.  If  there 
is  much  swelling  round  about  the  fracture  (which,  of 
course,  must  be  reduced  if  there  is  any  appreciable 
amount  of  displacement),  this  has  to  be  gently  stroked 
on  both  sides  of  the  clavicle,  but  the  collar-bone  itself 
must  not  be  massaged  upon.  The  subcutaneous  position 
of  the  clavicle  would  render  such  manipulations  very 
painful,  and  might,  under  circumstances,  even  injure 
the  thin  layer  of  soft  parts  covering  the  bony  fragments. 
During  the  third  week,  however,  gentle  kneading  or 
friction  (see  Fig.  7)  applied  by  the  finger-tips  to  the 
mass  of  callus  helps  to  produce  a  firm  union  and 
alleviates  the  pain. 

With   such   a  programme   of   treatment   the   period 


14  FRACTURES 

of  complete  recovery  will  in  reality  not  last  longer  than 
three  weeks,  and  there  will  be  no  necessity  for  any 
after-treatment. 

Fractures  of  the  humerus  in  its  upper  third  would 
certainly  yield  better  results,  if  not  left  to  themselves 
for  six  weeks.  Though  the  use  of  the  triangular  (Middel- 
dorpf's)  splint  is  recommended,  it  should  not  in  any 
case  be  worn  longer  than  a  fortnight,  and  should  be 
replaced  by  a  sling  at  the  end  of  this  period  or  even 
earlier.  Massage  is  commenced  on  the  second  day  after 
the  injury,  and  within  a  week  movements  are  introduced. 
In  carrying  them  out,  the  arm  is  supported  by  the 
surgeon  with  both  his  hands  below  and  above  the 
fracture.  Even  should  an  operation  have  been  made 
necessary,  considerable  improvement  of  function  is 
obtained  by  a  combination  of  operative  and  mechano- 
therapeutic  measures.  Especially  when  the  wound  has 
healed  up,  movements  can  be  carried  out  with  more 
vigour,  guided,  of  course,  by  careful  considerations. 

Massage  of  the  deltoid  is  all-important  in  every  case 
of  a  fracture  of  the  humerus.  The  deltoid  is  the  most 
important  muscle  of  the  arm  we  have  to  deal  with  in 
our  work,  and  it  has  only  one  rival  in  the  quadriceps 
of  the  leg.  They  both  undergo  a  most  rapid  atrophy 
following  a  complete  immobilisation  of  the  limbs  by 
splints,  and  the  functional  impairment  resulting  there- 
from is  often  appalling.  We  have  to  do  all  that  is  in 
our  power  to  preserve  their  strength,  if  we  do  not 
want  quite  unnecessarily  to  prolong  the  period  of 
recovery  for  many  weeks  after  the  osseous  union  has 
taken  place.  We  must  substitute  massage  and  passive 


THE  UPPER  EXTREMITY  15 

movements  for  the  active  normal  movements  which  the 
patient  is  now  unable  to  perform,  and  which  kept  his 
muscles  in  a  fit  condition  up  to  the  moment  of  the 
injury.  All  the  arm  muscles,  but  particularly  the 
deltoid,  should  be  thoroughly  kneaded  and  hacked  as 
well  as  stroked  at  the  commencement  and  at  the  end 
of  each  daily  sitting. 

Kneading  is  done  by  pinching  the  muscles  up  between 
the  thumbs  and  fingers,  both  hands  alternately 
squeezing  the  tissues  gently,  and  at  the  same  time 


\ 


FIG.  2. — KNEADING  (PINCHING, 
PETBISSAGE). 

moving  along  the  belly  of  the  muscle  (Fig.  2).  In 
addition  to  this,  the  whole  of  the  limb  may  be  grasped 
with  both  hands,  and  kneaded  as  if  it  were  dough  in  a 
bread-pan  (Fig.  3). 

Hacking  is  done  with  the  ulnar  borders  of  the  hands, 
and  chiefly  of  the  fingers.  The  little  fingers  alone  are 
in  direct  contact  with  the  parts  treated,  the  other 
three  falling  down  on  the  little  fingers  the  moment 
they  touch  the  body  of  the  patient,  thus  adding  to  the 
force  (Fig.  4).  The  hacking  movements  have  to  be 


16 


FRACTURES 


accomplished  by  frequent  and  rapid  ulnar  flexion  in 
the    wrist    joints    alone,    the   elbow   joints    being   kept 


FIG.  3. — KNEADING 
(GEASPING). 

motionless.  This  renders  the  hacking  more  elastic, 
and  at  the  same  time  more  penetrating,  so  that  it  exerts 
an  influence  on  the  deeper  layers  of  tissues,  and  is  less 


FIG.  4. — HACKING  (TATOTEMENT). 

fatiguing.  It  is  advisable  to  start  at  the  insertions 
of  the  muscles  in  our  case  it  will  be  the  insertion  of 
the  deltoid — and  to  move  upwards  towards  the  origin 


THE   UPPER   EXTREMITY  17 

of  the  muscles,  because  in  that  way  we  empty  the 
blood-vessels  better,  and  thus  remove  the  waste 
products  more  readily. 

My  experience  with  cases  in  which  smaller  portions 
of  bones  were  separated,  such  as  the  tuberosities  or  the 
coracoid  process,  taught  me,  that  it  is  of  infinitely  more 
importance  to  preserve  the  good  function  of  the  limb 
than  to  maintain  its  morphology. 

The  latter,  though  possibly  an  ideal  we  should  strive 
after,  must  sometimes  be  disregarded  in  the  interest 
of  our  patients,  who  in  these  cases  desire  but  a  useful 
limb.  Therefore  little  attention  should  be  paid  to 
the  character  of  such  injuries,  and  their  treatment 
should  resemble  that  of  simple  sprains  or  dislocations, 
which  will  be  discussed  in  a  separate  chapter  (see  Figs. 
18  and  19,  facing  pp.  42  and  43). 

Applying  splints  to  a  case  of  an  avulsed  tuberosity 
of  the  humerus  would  resemble  killing  flies  with  cannon- 
balls. 

A  case  of  an  ununited  fracture  through  the  middle 
of  the  humerus  in  a  man  I  had  some  time  ago,  may  be 
perhaps  of  some  interest  to  the  reader,  especially  as 
it  illustrates  two  points  together.  Though  an  opera- 
tion was  decided  upon  in  this  case,  I  obtained  per- 
mission to  apply  massage  first.  Within  a  fortnight  there 
was  so  much  bony  union  that  the  idea  of  an  opera- 
tive intervention  was  abandoned.  A  few  weeks  later 
the  patient  was  off  the  sick  list,  and  able  to  do  his  work. 

Even  if  one  is  not  at  all  of  a  hostile  disposition  towards 
operative  measures,  one  cannot  help  thinking  that  many 
operations  of  this  kind  are  performed  without  sufficient 
2 


18  FRACTURES 

understanding  of  facts,  which,  after  all,  ought  to  be 
pretty  obvious.  According  to  the  text-books,  most 
cases  of  non-union  are  due  to  malnutrition  of  the  limb, 
and  therefore  people  have  tried  thyroid  extract  and 
Bier's  treatment.  Not  in  vain  also  have  we  known 
plating  operations  being  performed  three  and  four 
times  without  success  ;  because  many  of  these  cases, 
if  operated  upon,  are  bound  to  give  bad  results,  and  to 
bring  the  operative  methods  into  discredit,  having 
suppuration,  and  finally  amputation,  a  disappointing 
sequel.  Interposition  of  soft  parts  is  no  such  serious 
mechanical  obstacle  as  is  often  imagined.  It  happens 
very  frequently  that  the  operation  confirms  the  absence 
of  any  such  hindrance,  and  even  should  this  be  present 
during  the  first  few  days,  it  need  not  remain  there 
for  months,  since  a  great  deal  of  it  becomes  absorbed  in 
the  course  of  a  few  weeks.  Operative  treatment  of  un- 
united  fractures  ought  to  be  undertaken  only  after  all 
the  other  methods  have  failed,  and  even  then  it  ought 
to  be  aided  by  massage,  which,  as  generally  understood, 
helps  to  raise  the  vitality  of  the  injured  parts  by  elimi- 
nating waste  products,  and  increasing  the  blood-supply. 
The  only  direct  indication  for  an  immediate  opera- 
tion is  given  by  the  bone  fragments  being  displaced 
to  such  an  extent  that  this  is  quite  incompatible  with 
anything  like  a  good  function  later  on.  This  must, 
however,  be  confirmed  by  a  radiograph,  taken  after 
the  bloodless  correction  has  failed.  If  all  the  operations 
were  always  carried  out  according  to  this  strict  indica- 
tion, the  results  would  be  probably  a  little  more  satis- 
factory on  the  whole. 


THE   UPPER  EXTREMITY  19 

In  the  above-mentioned  case  a  Gooch's  splint  was 
found  very  useful,  and  the  patient  had  to  wear  it  until 
the  union  was  completed.  As  long  as  the  callus  was 
still  soft,  there  was  a  great  danger  of  a  displacement, 
which  had  to  be  watched  very  carefully.  Massage  was 
given  to  the  deltoid,  the  biceps,  and  the  triceps  ;  the 
shoulder  was  moved  every  day  so  as  to  prevent  stiffness 
and  atrophy  of  the  shoulder  muscles,  and  shrinking  of 
the  joint  apparatus  ;  the  humerus  was  well  supported 
above  and  below  the  fracture,  whilst  these  evolutions 
were  carried  out. 

More  freedom  should  be  given  to  the  arm  in  cases 
of  supra-condyloid  fracture,  in  which  there  is  always  a 
considerable  danger  of  muscular  or  nerve  paralysis,  if 
splints  are  applied  too  tight,  and  the  circulation 
neglected.  IschsBmic  contracture  of  the  hand  is  very 
common  in  cases  where  there  was  any  pressure  on  the 
forearm. 

I  have  got  under  my  care  a  girl,  who,  five  years  ago, 
sustained  a  fracture  of  the  lower  end  of  the  humerus, 
and  had  a  splint  put  on.  The  next  day  she  developed 
all  the  signs  of  Volkmann's  paralysis  due  to  defective 
blood- supply,  resulting  in  an  absolutely  crippled  hand. 
She  was  under  treatment  for  a  year  and  a  half,  and  has 
improved  so  far  that  she  can  do  some  sewing  and 
darning.  (See  The  Lancet,  May  17th,  1913,  "A  case 
of  Volkmann's  Ischsemic  Contracture  of  the  Hand/') 
(Figs.  5  and  6.) 

Many  of  the  different  types  of  fractures  of  the  elbow 
region  can  here  be  dealt  with  summarily.  Experience 
has  taught  me  that  from  the  point  of  view  of  the  treat- 


20  FRACTURES 

ment  and  of  the  subsequent  recovery  it  is  to  a  certain 
extent  immaterial  what  kind  of  fracture  we  have  before 
us.  Be  it  a  fracture  of  the  lower  end  of  the  humerus, 
where  only  a  small  portion  of  the  bone  has  been  separated ; 
be  it  the  head  of  the  radius  that  suffered  the  break  ;  or 
be  it  that  one  of  the  epiphyses  of  the  elbow  has  become 
separated — the  treatment  must  be  carried  out  with 
the  view  of  preventing  stiffness  and  final  limitation  of 
movements  at  this  joint.  An  exact  diagnosis,  con- 
firmed by  radiographic  examination,  is,  however,  very 
valuable,  especially  with  regard  to  the  prognosis  and 
duration  of  treatment. 

Massage  must  be  started  immediately  in  these  cases, 
because  the  joint  generally  presents  a  very  extensive 
hcemarthros.  Passive  movements  are  carried  out  very 
gently  from  the  first,  whilst  the  muscles  of  the  arm 
(mainly  the  biceps  and  the  triceps)  are  gently  kneaded 
and  stroked  with  the  other  hand,  so  as  to  obtain  as 
complete  a  relaxation  of  their  spasm  as  possible.  Every 
day  these  movements  are  performed  once  or  twice  in 
each  direction  :  pronation  and  supination,  flexion  and 
extension.  Too  much  movement  may  favour  the  pro- 
duction of  an  unnecessarily  great  amount  of  callus  un- 
desirable in  a  joint.  (This  applies  especially  to  children.) 
Active  movements  are  commenced  during  the  second  to 
third  week.  Splints  are  better  not  used  at  all  than  worn 
too  long,  a  sling  rendering  a  sufficient  protection,  and 
the  arm  is  kept  well  flexed  the  first  week  or  two. 

Fracture  of  the  olecranon,  if  without  any  too  great 
displacement  of  the  fragments,  is  best  treated  by 
massage  and  early  movements,  splints  being  quite 


-JK 


2P' 


M 


o 


z 

ass 


THE  UPPER  EXTREMITY  21 

unnecessary.  A  strip  of  adhesive  plaster  may  be  put 
round  the  lower  third  of  the  upper  arm  to  prevent  the 
upper  fragment  from  being  pulled  upwards  by  the 
triceps.  Should  the  displacement  be  considerable,  the 
fully  extended  arm  is  fixed  to  a  Gooch's  splint  by  means 
of  a  bandage  and  massaged  daily,  movements  being 
commenced  after  a  week.  Old-standing  fractures  of 
the  olecranon  are  best  operated  upon  if  the  function 
is  impaired,  and  there  is  a  wide  gap  between  the  frag- 
ments. 

Fractures  of  both  ulna  and  radius,  especially  in  children 
where  they  are  commonly  of  the  green-stick  variety,  give 
excellent  results  with  massage  and  movements  applied 
early.  Particularly  important  is  the  extension  of  the 
fingers  carried  out  simultaneously  with  the  extension 
of  the  wrist,  which  should  be  started  on  the  first  day. 
The  reason  why  stress  should  be  laid  on  this  particular 
movement  is  the  common  injury  of  the  flexors  of  the 
fingers  caused  by  the  fracture,  and  this  may  become 
noticeable  only  when  the  fingers  are  hyperex tended. 
Considerable  impairment  of  function  may  result  in  such 
cases  if  the  condition  is  not  recognised  early  enough. 
Other  movements,  and  particularly  pronation  and 
supination  (see  Fig.  8)  are  practised  during  the  second 
week.  Stroking  ought  to  accompany  all  these  passive 
movements,  since  it  reduces  the  muscular  spasm  which 
often  interferes  with  a  successful  application  of  such 
manipulations. 

Colles's  fracture,  being  decidedly  one  of  the  com- 
monest fractures  in  general,  is  particularly  frequent 
in  private  practice.  Although  it  only  requires  an 


22  FRACTURES 

ambulatory  treatment,  the  results  are  often  very  un- 
satisfactory. Here,  again,  pain  and  stiffness  are  the 
usual  complaints,  deformity  being  unfortunately  also  a 
common  appearance. 

In  order  to  obtain  constantly  better  results  a  complete 
reduction  on  the  very  day  of  the  accident  must  be 
insisted  upon  in  every  case.  Stroking  of  the  forearm 
should  always  precede  the  reduction,  which  will  thus 
be  rendered  easy  in  every  way  :  it  relieves  pain  and 
reduces  the  muscular  spasm  which  is  one  of  the  chief 
obstacles  to  a  satisfactory  reduction.  The  forearm  is 
then  placed  on  an  ordinary  splint,  which  ought  to 
reach  as  far  as  the  middle  of  the  palm.  Gentle  stroking 
and  full  passive  flexion  as  well  as  extension  of  the  . 
fingers,  the  thumb  being  the  most  important  of  them 
all,  constitute  the  programme  for  the  first  few  days. 
Such  early  movements  of  the  fingers  are  absolutely 
indispensable,  because  of  the  great  number  of  tendons 
and  tendon- sheaths  passing  right  over  the  site  of  the 
fracture,  and  therefore  directly  participating  in  the 
injury.  Those  belonging  to  the  thumb  are  most  in- 
timately connected  with  the  fracture  by  being,  so  to 
say,  embedded  in  the  extravasated  blood.  Active  move- 
ments of  the  fingers  and  passive  ones  of  the  wrist 
joint,  particularly  pronation  and  supination  (see  Fig.  8), 
are  introduced  before  the  end  of  the  first  week.  Ex- 
tension of  the  wrist  is  the  only  movement  which  should 
commence  a  little  later,  as  it  has  been  alleged  by  some 
authors  to  favour  backward  displacement  of  the  lower 
fragment.  (The  same  caution  applies  also  to  fractures 
of  the  scaphoid.)  The  muscles  of  the  forearm  are  every 


THE    UPPER    EXTREMITY 


23 


day   subjected  to  an  energetic  kneading  to  counteract 
their  atrophy. 

By  the  end  of  ten  days  the  splint  is  discarded,  and 


FIG.   7. — FRICTION  (DEEP  KNEADING). 

only  a  sling  used  for  another  few  days.     Friction  (deep 
kneading)  over  the  fracture  (Fig.  7),  and  active  movc- 


FIG.  8. — PASSIVE  PRONATION  AND 

SuriNATION. 

In  order  to  carry  out  these  two  most  important  movements 
one  hand  must  grasp  the  arm  just  above  the  fracture  and 
help  to  rotate  the  wrist,  whilst  the  other  hand  controls  the 
patient's  own  hand. 

raents  against  resistance  may  now  be  commenced.  The 
amount  of  resistance  is  regulated  by  the  surgeon,  accord- 
ing to  the  strength  of  the  patient,  and  ought  not 


24  FRACTURES 

to  cause  too  much  pain  (Fig.  8).  It  is  essential  that 
patients  should  exercise  their  wrists  at  home  as  much 
as  possible  and  at  frequent  intervals. 

By  the  end  of  three  to  four  weeks  most  of  the  patients 
treated  in  this  way  will  be  able  to  resume  their  occupa- 
tions. 

Some  time  ago  I  had  a  bad  case,  a  labourer  who 
sustained  a  comminuted  fracture  of  the  lower  end  of  the 
radius,  but  who,  nevertheless,  four  weeks  after  the 
accident,  was  able  to  start  his  heavy  work.  He  was 
treated  on  precisely  the  same  lines  as  all  the  other 
cases  of  typical  Colles's  fracture.  Considering  the  great 
damage  of  the  bone,  and  the  kind  of  occupation  of  this 
patient,  the  result  must  be  called  a  very  satisfactory 
one,  moreover,  the  length  of  time  required  being  the 
usual. 

I  have  repeatedly  found  that  patients  with  Colles's 
fracture  complain  of  an  indefinite  pain  situated  not  at 
the  broken  end  of  the  radius,  but  over  the  styloid 
process  of  the  ulna,  after  the  fracture  has  become 
firmly  united.  This  must  be  due  to  a  laceration  of  the 
ligament  attached  there,  and  ought  to  receive  special 
attention  as  soon  as  it  has  been  recognised.  Deep 
kneading  with  both  thumbs  placed  just  over  the  radial 
side  of  the  ulna,  and  between  the  two  bones  as  well, 
soon  relieves  this  pain,  which  often  is  the  only  cause 
of  the  patients'  inability  to  use  their  hands. 

Fractures  of  the  metacarpals  and  phalanges  are  fairly 
abundant  in  general  practice,  and  therefore  must  not 
be  left  without  due  attention  being  given  to  them. 
Here  more  than  anywhere  else  the  necessity  of  mechano- 


THE   UPPER  EXTREMITY  25 

therapeutic  treatment  is  obvious,  and  its  aims  clear. 
If  the  fingers  are  not  too  badly  damaged,  so  as  to  make 
amputation  imperative,  they  should  be  treated  in  the 
following  way.  After  the  splints  and  dressings  (if  any) 
have  been  removed,  the  hand  is  placed  into  a  basin 
with  warm  boracic  lotion,  and  passive  movements  are 
carried  out  for  at  least  twenty  minutes,  night  and 
morning.  During  the  second  week  the  patient  is  en- 
couraged to  perform  active  movements  in  the  bath. 
The  third  week  is  spent  in  practising  flexion  and  extension 
against  resistance.  Even  if  there  is  no  laceration  of 
soft  parts,  a  warm  arm  bath  is  found  useful  in  the  active 
exercises  which  the  patients  have  to  do  at  home. 
Flexion,  extension,  and  rotation  of  the  wrist  ought  to 
be  included  in  the  daily  programme. 

As  soon  as  the  skin  has  healed  up,  massage  in  form 
of  centripetal  stroking  can  be  done  as  well.  This,  of 
course,  may  be  commenced  on  the  first  day  if  there 
has  been  no  external  laceration,  or  in  other  words  if 


FIG.  9. — CENTRIPETAL  STROKING  OF  FINGERS. 

the  fracture  was  a  simple  one.  It  is  best  done  by 
grasping  the  terminal  phalanx  of  the  injured  finger 
between  the  tips  of  one's  own  thumb,  index,  and  the 
middle  finger  and  moving  them  along,  towards  the 
knuckles  (Fig.  9).  This  movement  is  often  practised 


26  FRACTURES 

by  surgeons  who,  having  put  on  rubber  gloves,  attempt 
to  smooth  out  all  the  little  folds  on  their  fingers.  Splints 
should  in  no  case  be  worn  longer  than  a  fortnight. 

Reduction  of  displaced  fragments  is  indispensable  in 
all  cases,  if  good  results  are  to  be  obtained.  Fractured 
metacarpals  receive  a  good  support  from  a  pad  in  the 
palm,  and  a  closed-fist-bandage.  Early  movement  is 
essential  on  account  of  the  extensor  tendons  running 
across  the  fracture,  and  the  possibility  of  their  being 
caught  by  the  callus.  Deep  friction  should  be  applied 
to  the  inter-metacarpal  spaces. 

Bennett's  fracture  of  the  base  of  the  first  metacarpal 
does  very  well  with  the  splint  bearing  the  same  great 
surgeon's  name.  Extension  is  indicated  in  almost  all 
cases.  Contiguous  fingers  may  be  used  as  lateral  splints 
in  cases  of  fractured  phalanges.  The  sling  should  never 
be  worn  longer  than  it  is  absolutely  necessary,  as  it 
does  not  the  least  encourage  the  patients  to  use  their 
limb. 

One  point  is  worth  remembering  when  practising 
flexion  of  injured  fingers  :  the  physiological  limit  of 
this  movement.  When  the  patient  succeeds  in  bending 
his  first  (ground)  phalanx  to  right  angles  with  the 
metacarpals,  one  should  not  force  him  to  go  beyond 
that  point  in  anticipation  of  achieving  still  better 
results,  as  the  right  angle  is  the  limit  for  the  majority 
of  normal  people.  Any  attempt  to  bend  the  fingers 
farther  still  will  only  cause  unnecessary  pain,  which 
may  easily  be  verified  on  one's  own  fingers. 

All  that  has  been  said  about  the  compound  fractures 
of  the  fingers  applies  with  the  same  strength  to  all 


THE  LOWER  EXTREMITY  27 

compound   fractures,    with   but   very   slight   modifica- 
tions. 


THE   LOWER   EXTREMITY 

Fracture  of  the  neck  of  the  femur  in  children  and 
adolescents  calls  for  the  application  of  massage  and 
movements  for  reasons  different  from  those  which  apply 
in  the  case  of  adults,  and  still  more  of  aged  people. 
In  the  first  group  of  patients  it  is  the  good  function  that 
we  want  to  preserve  ;  in  the  second  it  is  the  life.  The 
value  of  early  massage  in  these  cases  is  absolutely 
unquestionable,  and  most  of  the  text-books  of  a  more 
recent  date  recommend  such  practice  emphatically, 
advising  us  to  induce  the  older  patients  to  leave  their 
beds  within  a  fortnight  of  the  injury.  The  reason  for 
their  doing  so  is  by  no  means  a  trivial  one.  We  all 
know  the  great  danger  of  hypostatic  pneumonia  from 
prolonged  rest  in  bed.  Therefore  we  must  do  everything 
we  can  in  order  to  stimulate  the  sluggish  circulation 
of  the  older  patients  (see  chapter  on  pulmonary  troubles). 
Besides  the  general  applications,  however,  the  leg  must 
receive  full  attention.  It  should  be  massaged  from  the 
toes  right  up  to  the  groin,  and  upwards  stroking, 
kneading,  and  hacking  of  the  calf  and  thigh  muscles 
should  be  carried  out  every  day.  Movements  of  the 
foot  and  knee  (if  possible)  should  be  given  in  every  case 
as  well.  If  not  impacted  the  fracture  is  put  up  in 
some  kind  of  splint,  preferably  Hodgen's,  because  this 
permits  of  an  easy  access  to  the  limb. 

Extreme  abduction  is  maintained  all  the  time,  and 


28  FRACTURES 

e version  is  to  be  prevented.  Impacted  fracture  of  the 
neck  in  middle-aged  persons  should  be  undone  if  the 
shortening  exceeds  one  inch ;  if  not,  it  should  be 
disregarded,  and  the  patient  allowed  to  carry  out  active 
movements  after  a  fortnight  had  passed  since  the 
occurrence  of  the  injury.  He  should  get  up  after  three 
weeks,  and  use  his  leg  in  walking.  If  the  impaction 
had  to  be  undone  on  account  of  a  considerable  shorten- 
ing, a  delay  must  necessarily  take  place  with  regard 
to  the  union,  as  well  as  in  the  free  use  of  the  limb.  In 
these  cases  it  is  wiser  to  re- apply  the  splint  for  the 
night,  the  leg  being  well  abducted,  until  a  complete 
bony  union  has  been  established  between  the  neck  and 
the  shaft  of  the  femur.  This  would  counteract  the 
natural  tendency  of  the  soft  bone  to  produce  a  traumatic 
coxa  vara. 

Fracture  through  the  middle  of  the  thigh  is  treated  on 
much  the  same  principles.  Particular  care  must  be 
taken  to  preserve  the  strength  of  the  quadriceps  muscle 
in  the  same  way  as  was  described  in  connection  with 
the  deltoid  in  fractures  of  the  arm.  In  stroking  up  the 
thigh,  one  ought  to  lift  one's  hand  up  when  approaching 
the  point  of  the  fracture,  in  order  to  avoid  unnecessary 
pain.  Passive  movements  and  massage  of  the  knee 
are  of  great  importance  if  one  wants  to  avoid  stiffness 
of  the  whole  leg  for  many  months  afterwards.  The 
reason  for  this  is,  that  an  effusion  into  the  knee  joint 
very  frequently  accompanies  fractures  of  the  thigh. 

It  is  best  to  put  up  the  leg  in  full  abduction,  the 
foot  being  absolutely  vertical  to  the  surface  of  the  bed. 
Bed-clothes  must  not  touch  the  toes,  but  should  be 


THE  LOWER  EXTREMITY  29 

placed  over  a  wire  cage  ;  otherwise  they  will  invariably 
tend  to  evert  the  foot.  Any  linear  or  angular  displace- 
ment is  corrected  at  once,  the  leg  being  measured  from 
time  to  time. 

Within  three  weeks  from  the  day  of  the  injury  all 
movements  should  be  freely  practised  :  flexion,  exten- 
sion, abduction,  adduction,  and  rotation  in  the  hip 
joint.  Within  four  weeks  the  patient  is  allowed  to 
get  up  and  to  walk  on  crutches,  which  are  discarded  in 
a  week  or  so,  and  he  ought  to  be  able  to  use  his  leg 
normally  six  to  eight  weeks  after  the  original  injury. 

In  children,  massage  is  employed  with  equally  good 
results.  Here  the  suspension  of  the  leg  permits  of  an 
easy  access  to  the  thigh. 

Of  great  interest  is  the  fracture  of  the  patella.  Al- 
though the  idea  that  good  results  can  only  be  obtained 
by  operative  measures  seems  to  be  prevalent  amongst 
the  profession,  yet  there  are  certain  points  which  often 
necessitate  the  adoption  of  another  mode  of  treatment 
in  some  cases.  There  is,  first  of  all,  a  certain  number 
of  patients  who  for  some  reason  or  other  do  not  want 
to  give  their  consent  to  an  operation  which  is  not  of 
the  life-saving  type.  Then,  there  is  the  risk  of  a  secon- 
dary suppuration.  However  aseptically  or  antiseptically 
the  operation  may  be  carried  out,  the  mere  presence 
of  a  foreign  body  in  the  synovial  cavity  will  attract 
micro-organisms  circulating  in  the  blood.  Silver  wire 
shares  in  this  respect  the  fate  of  deep  silk  stitches.  It 
is  a  well-known  fact  that  even  an  ordinary  knock — 
hardly  deserving  the  name  of  a  trauma — is  often 
responsible  for  the  origin  of  a  serious  condition,  such 


30 


FRACTURES 


as  osteo-myelitis,  although  no  interruption  of  the 
continuity  of  the  skin  had  taken  place.  I  saw  once  a 
case  of  a  wired  patella  which  had  gone  septic  six  weeks 
after  the  operation,  and  long  after  the  wound  had 
healed  up  completely  ;  the  empyema  of  the  knee  joint 
that  ensued  remained  uncontrollable  for  several  months. 
An  alternative  to  the  wiring  operation  is  strapping. 
Strips  of  adhesive  plaster,  about  ten  inches  long,  are 
applied  to  the  knee,  alternately  above  and  below  the 
knee-cap,  in  such  a  manner  that  the  fragments  are 
brought  close  together.  There  are  about  four  straps 
fixed  below  and  four  above,  their  ends  overlapping. 


FIG.  10. — STROKING  (EFFLEURAGE)  OF  THIGH 

Note  the  position  of  the  left  hand,  which  in  this  case 
steadies  the  upper  fragment  of  the  patella. 

Massage  of  the  quadriceps  is  taken  up  at  once,  but 
upwards  stroking  is  carried  out  very  gently  in  order 
not  to  pull  the  fragments  asunder,  and  for  this  reason 
also  the  upper  fragment  of  the  patella  is  steadied 
by  the  other  hand  (Fig.  10).  Kneading  and  hacking, 
however,  is  done  very  energetically,  as  it  is  surprising 
how  quickly  and  to  what  an  extent  the  quadriceps. 


THE  LOWER   EXTREMITY  31 

muscle  undergoes  atrophy  if  not  properly  treated.  The 
calf  muscles  and  the  foot,  of  course,  are  included.  It 
is  of  utmost  importance  to  move  the  fragments  of  the 
knee-cap  to  and  fro,  so  as  to  prevent  their  becoming 


FIG.  11. — MOBILISATION  OF  THE  PATELLA. 

adherent  to  the  articular  surface  of  the  femur,  since 
this  is  often  found  to  be  the  main  reason  of  a  subse- 
quent functional  impairment  of  the  joint.  Fragments 
naturally  are  moved  as  one  whole,  and  not  separately 
(Fig.  11). 

During  the  second  week  gentle  passive  movements, 
such  as  bending  and  stretching  of  the  knee,  are  com- 
menced, as  well  as  friction  around  the  joint.  The  third 
week  is  occupied  with  active  movements  of  the  leg 
in  the  hip,  knee,  and  ankle  joints,  walking  with  a  stick 
being  also  allowed. 

One  of  my  cases,  an  elderly  gentleman,  was  confined 
to  bed  for  five  weeks  before  I  saw  him.  Extension  had 
been  applied  to  the  leg  all  the  time,  and  the  patient 


32  FRACTURES 

not  allowed  to  get  up.  The  leg  was  in  consequence 
wasted  ad  maximum,  and  the  mental  condition  of  the 
patient  was  that  of  great  worry  and  distress.  He 
thought  he  would  never  get  better.  However,  within 
three  weeks  he  was  able  to  attend  at  his  office  in  the 
City,  and  on  his  way  home  he  managed  to  walk  up  a 
pretty  steep  hill  in  Hampstead.  He  was  treated  on 
precisely  the  same  lines  as  described  above.  I  may 
add  that  in  his  case  an  operation  was  refused  on 
account  of  the  patient's  age  and  his  great  nervousness. 
Two  months  later  the  leg  was  still  in  good  condition. 
It  would  have  probably  taken  much  less  time  if  there 
had  not  been  such  a  long  period  of  immobilisation. 
Many  adhesions  had  to  be  broken  down  which  might 
have  been  so  easily  prevented  by  a  few  early  movements. 

Fractures  of  the  tibia  and  fibula  can  be  briefly  dealt 
with.  It  is  of  importance  that  the  extensors  and  flexors 
of  the  foot  and  toes  should  not  become  wasted.  The 
patient  should,  therefore,  be  encouraged  to  move  his 
toes  from  the  first  day,  in  spite  of  slight  discomfort. 
If  there  has  been  any  effusion  into  the  ankle  joint, 
a  bad  stiffness  of  the  foot  may  result,  and  for  this 
reason  movements  should  be  carried  out  in  that  joint 
as  soon  as  possible.  Massage  is  applied  to  the  whole 
leg  in  the  same  manner  as  was  described  in  connection 
with  other  fractures.  To  facilitate  movements  of  the 
foot  the  leg  is  supported  by  one  hand  placed  under 
the  knee,  which  is  kept  slightly  bent,  the  foot  gently 
resting  on  its  heel  (Fig.  12). 

The  fact  that  the  fractures  of  the  leg  are  very 
frequently  compound  does  not  much  influence  our  views 


THE  LOWER  EXTREMITY  33 

with  regard  to  their  treatment.  The  external  wound 
is  protected  by  a  dressing,  and  carefully  avoided  during 
the  administration  of  massage.  If  there  have  been  no 


FIG.  12. — PASSIVE  MOBILISATION  or  THE 
FOOT  IN  FRACTURES  or  THE  LEO. 

signs  of  sepsis  during  the  first  few  days  after  the  injury, 
no  danger  can  arise  from  such  practice  afterwards. 

Six  weeks  ought  to  be  the  maximum  time  necessary 
for  complete  recovery  from  a  double  fracture  of  the 
leg,  and  I  have  actually  seen  cases  taken  off  the  sick- 
list  at  the  end  of  this  period.  Fractures  of  either  tibia 
or  fibula  alone  require  considerably  less  time  (Figs.  13 
and  14).  The  use  of  a  removable  plaster  of  Paris  case 
(Croft's  splint)  is  commendable,  as  it  permits  of  both 
early  massage  and  early  walking  long  before  the  bone 
has  become  completely  united.  The  callus  remains  soft 
and  pliable  for  about  five  weeks  after  the  injury,  so 
that  any  slight  displacement  can  be  easily  corrected. 

Some  time  back  I  had  a  case  in  which  I  could  give 
the  bones  any  shape  I  liked  up  to  the  sixth  week  ;  a 
small  weight  on  a  pulley  did  in  a  few  hours  all  that 
3 


34 


FRACTURES 


was  necessary.  It  should  be  remembered  that  the 
normal  leg  has  a  slight  outward  curve  which,  if  possible, 
ought  to  be  preserved. 

The  next  common  fracture  of  the  lower  extremity  is 


FIG.  13. — THE  SAME  CASE  AS  FIG.  14,  FOUR 

WEEKS  AFTER  THE  ACCIDENT. 
The   whole   weight  of  the  patient's  body  is  put  on  the 
toes   of  the  injured   side.      There  is  no  pain  on  walking 
whatever. 

Pott's  fracture.  This  is  probably  the  kind  of  fracture 
that  generally  gives  the  worst  results.  Almost  every 
day  we  meet  cases  that  have  been  unable  to  follow  any 
kind  of  occupation  for  months  and  months. 


k 


FIG.   14. — FEACTURE  or  TIBIA  (Bov  OF  11).     SEE  FIG.  13. 


34] 


THE   LOWER  EXTREMITY  35 

I  have  to  think  of  a  chauffeur  whom  I  saw  recently, 
and  who  could  not  put  his  foot  on  the  brake  for  several 
months.  Though  there  was  a  perfect  bony  union,  so 
much  pain  was  evolved  through  the  slightest  pressure 
that  the  patient  had  to  undergo  a  long  course  of  massage 
before  he  could  resume  his  responsible  work. 

Next  to  the  pain,  and  just  as  intractable,  is  the 
colossal  oedema  that  nearly  always  accompanies  bad 
Pott's  fractures.  This  can  only  be  explained  by  a 
very  defective  circulation,  partly  caused  by  swelling 
of  the  joints  in  the  first  few;  days  after  the  injury,  but 
greatly  due  to  a  diminished  tonus  of  the  blood-vessels 
as  the  result  of  muscular  inactivity.  Both  stasis  and 
pain  can  be  prevented  if  massage  and  movements  are 
commenced  immediately  after  the  injury. 

No  matter  what  type  of  fractured  ankle  we  have 
before  us,  whether  it  be  the  classical  Pott,  inverted 
Pott,  or  Dupuytren,  the  chief  point  is  the  same  in  all 
cases,  namely  effusion  into  the  ankle  joint  as  well 
as  into  its  vicinity,  and  therefore  they  all  have  to  be 
treated  in  a  similar  fashion.  After  the  displacement  has 
been  duly  corrected,  massage  of  the  swollen  joint  should 
be  applied  without  delay.  The  right  foot  is  placed  on 
the  surgeon's  left  knee,  leaving  the  heel  free.  The 
surgeon  places  his  right  thumb  behind  the  internal,  the 
rest  of  his  fingers  behind  the  external  malleoli,  thus  in 
a  way  embracing  the  Achilles  tendon,  and  carries  out 
stroking  movements  in  the  centripetal  direction  alone 
(Fig.  15).  The  surgeon's  left  hand  steadies  the  foot  by 
holding  it  across  the  instep.  (The  left  foot  is  treated 
in  the  reverse  way.)  The  hand  being  now  pronated, 


36  FRACTURES 

the  dorsum  of  the  foot  is  massaged  likewise,  also  the 
calf  has  to  be  stroked  and  kneaded.  The  gentlest  pos- 
sible movements  ought  to  be  applied  in  the  beginning, 
as  the  pain  is  generally  very  intense. 

Within  three  days  the  swelling  will  have  subsided 
so  far  as  to  permit  passive  movements,  and  flexion 
and  extension,  adduction  and  inversion,  are  those  to  be 
practised  first.  Abduction  and  e version  need  not  be 
encouraged,  since  they  are  apt  to  favour  displacement 


FIG.  1 5. — MASSAGE  OF  THE 
ANKLES. 


so  characteristic  in  fractures  of  the  ankle,  which  leads 
to  the  deformity  known  as  traumatic  flat  foot. 

In  order  to  carry  out  passive  movements,  one  hand 
steadies  the  leg  above  the  ankle,  and  the  other  holds 
the  foot,  preferably  placing  the  thumb  on  the  dorsum, 
and  the  other  fingers  on  the  sole  of  the  foot.  Active 
movements  of  the  same  kind,  with  similar  exceptions, 
are  begun  during  the  second  week.  Special  stress 
should  be  laid  on  good  adduction  and  inversion,  so  as 
to  maintain  a  good  arch  of  the  foot,  and  to  strengthen 


THE  LOWER   EXTREMITY  37 

the  tibial  muscles.  Plaster -of -Paris  splints,  though  very 
practical  with  regard  to  early  walking,  are  not  advisable, 
as  they  do  not  permit  of  any  movements  and  massage, 
unless  they  are  made  removable.  If  neglected,  the 
muscles  are  bound  to  become  atrophied  and  weakened. 
Kneading  of  the  ankle  region,  with  finger-tips  directed 
towards  the  ends  of  both  malleoli,  will  stimulate  the 
formation  of  callus,  and  disperse  the  oedema  ;  the  latter 
will  also  improve  considerably  if  the  foot  be  kept 
elevated  during  the  night. 

Splints  should  not  be  applied  longer  than  ten  days, 
after  which  period  the  patient  is  allowed  to  get  up,  but 
not  to  put  his  foot  to  the  ground.  Walking  is  com- 
menced only  when  there  is  no  more  danger  of  the  foot 
being  displaced  outwards,  and  this  would  not  be  safe 


Fio.  16. — TIP- TOEING. 

before  the  fourth  week,  especially  in  heavy  people. 
Patients  must  be  reminded  that  once  they  start 
walking,  they  should  place  their  feet  parallel  to  one 
another. 

Exercises  against  resistance  (adduction  and  inversion, 
flexion  and  extension)  should  be  persevered  with  for 


38  FRACTURES 

another  fortnight.  Tip-toeing  with  the  feet  inverted 
(Fig.  16)  should  be  practised  by  the  patient  himself 
every  morning  for  another  month  or  longer.  It  will 
be  found  that  the  results  of  Pott's  fracture  will  be  much 
more  satisfactory  if  treated  in  the  above  manner,  and 
will  not  disable  the  patient  for  longer  than  six  weeks. 

A  special  point  to  be  observed  during  treatment 
is  the  finding  out  of  tender  areas  in  the  neighbourhood 
of  the  fractures.  Some  of  them  are  more  constant  than 
others.  There  is,  for  instance,  nearly  always  an  ex- 
cruciating pain  elicited  by  pressure  right  in  the  middle 
of  the  calf,  between  the  heads  of  the  gastrocnemii, 
probably  due  to  a  ha3matoma  close  to  one  of  the  bigger 
nerves.  Also  the  parts  along  the  Achilles  tendon  are 
frequently  found  to  be  tender,  which  is  most  likely 
caused  by  an  extravasation  of  blood  in  the  sheath  of 
this  tendon.  Other  spots  are  scattered  all  over  the 
leg,  often  situated  between  the  extensor  muscles.  Deep 
kneading  relieves  pain  so  rapidly,  that  tenderness  often 
disappears  completely  within  a  day  or  two. 

As  a  parallel  to  the  case  of  the  chauffeur,  I  might 
quote  that  of  a  pianist  of  over  seventy,  whom  I  treated 
quite  recently.  Five  weeks  after  the  injury  this  patient 
walked  without  any  support  whatever,  and  could  bend 
his  knees  whilst  standing  on  tip-toe.  No  trace  of  pain 
or  oedema,  no  limitation  of  movements,  no  displacement 
in  spite  of  a  treble  fracture.  Two  fragments  of  the 
tibia,  and  one  of  the  fibula,  were  chipped  off  the  lower 
ends,  as  confirmed  by  the  radiograph  (Fig.  17).  The 
age  of  the  patient  had  not  the  slightest  effect  on  the 
length  of  the  time  required  for  his  recovery. 


THE  LOWER  EXTREMITY  30 

Complete  reduction  of  the  fracture  on  the  first  day 
under  an  anaesthetic,  and  an  early  application  of  mechano- 
l/t<r<i/)eutics,  are  the  only  factors  responsible  for  the 
di (Terence  between  these  two  cases. 

Fractured  metatarsals  require  considerably  less  time, 


FIG.   17. — TREBLE  FRACTURE  OF  THE 
ANKLE. 

since  they  do  not  upset  the  mechanism  of  the  foot  so 
much  as  Pott's  fractures  do  :  the  architecture  of  the 
foot  is  maintained  by  the  other  metatarsals  in  spite  of 
one  of  them  being  broken.  Massage  of  the  foot,  which 
consists,  besides  stroking,  also  of  kneading  with  both 
thumbs  placed  on  the  dorsum,  and  the  fingers  on  the 


40  FRACTURES 

sole  will  soon  establish  normal  circulatory  conditions. 
Exercises  include  tip-toeing  and  transverse  bending  of 
the  foot,  along  an  imaginary  line,  running  parallel  to 
the  metatarsals.  Walking  will  thus  be  made  possible 
during  the  third  week. 

Fractured  toes  are  treated  exactly  like  fractures  of 
the  fingers,  as  described  above. 

In  concluding  this  chapter  I  must  add  a  word  on 
the  objections  that  have  been  raised  with  regard  to 
massage  and  movements  in  fractures. 

The  formation  of  excessive  callus  had  been  alleged  to 
be  one  of  the  consequences  of  early  massage.  It  is  a 
fact  that  massage  does  favour  formation  of  callus,  and 
for  this  reason  we  apply  it  in  cases  of  ununited  frac- 
tures. But,  personally,  I  have  not  seen  one  single  case 
in  which  the  just-mentioned  complication  should  have 
occurred.  Evidently,  those  cases  in  which  an  abnormal 
amount  of  callus  thrown  out  caused  an  impairment  of 
function  were  either  cases  of  what  is  called  "  exuberant 
callus,"  which  happens  even  in  fractures  treated  by 
the  old  methods  of  prolonged  immobilisation,  or  the 
massage  was  applied  incorrectly,  to  say  the  least. 

I  dare  say  the  majority  of  those  whose  views  on  the 
latest  management  of  fractures  are  sceptic,  have  never 
carried  out  massage  themselves,  and  judge  only  by  the 
results  of  some  third  person's  work,  or  they  would 
have  undoubtedly  come  to  a  different  issue. 

It  has  also  been  alleged  that  pulmonary  embolism 
was  a  much  feared  complication  of  massage ;  this, 
however,  is  absolutely  denied  by  men  of  such  wide 
experience  in  fractures  as  Sir  William  Bennett. 


SPRAINED  JOINTS  AND  DISLOCATIONS    41 

There  is  one  more  point  I  want  to  draw  the  readers' 
attention  to,  and  that  is  the  psychic  influence  of  our 
treatment  on  the  patient.  It  helps  the  patient  to 
overcome  his  timidity  of  using  the  injured  limb  more 
gradually,  and  it  gives  him  more  confidence,  through 
his  being  able  to  watch  the  daily  progress  of  his  case. 

B.    SPRAINED  JOINTS   AND   DISLOCATIONS 

The  treatment  of  what  is  popularly  called  sprains 
does  not  differ  essentially  from  the  treatment  of  frac- 
tures. There  are,  however,  two  points  to  remember. 
Firstly  :  no  sprains  should  ever  be  put  up  in  splints  ; 
and  secondly  :  active  movements  should  be  commenced 
on  the  first  day,  besides  the  usual  employment  of  mas- 
sage. If  both  these  points  will  be  adhered  to,  the 
period  of  recovery  will  be  considerably  shorter  than 
it  is  in  cases  in  which  splints  and  a  long  rest  are 
prescribed.  By  immobilisation  of  ordinary  sprains  we 
only  lose  time,  and  miss  the  chance  of  preventing  the 
formation  of  adhesions.  It  is  always  a  risky  thing  to 
leave  a  haematoma  alone  there,  where  good  function 
is  particularly  desirable. 

Everybody  who  has  attended  post-mortem  examina- 
tions, and  has  had  to  remove  the  lungs  himself,  knows 
to  what  an  extent  adhesions  can  form  in  serous  cavities  ; 
and  he  will  realise  that  if  such  firm  bands  and  strings 
can  originate  in  the  thorax,  despite  the  respiratory 
movements,  how  infinitely  more  likelihood  of  their 
formation  there  must  be  in  such  serous  cavities  as  the 
immobilised  joints. 


42     SPRAINED   JOINTS  AND   DISLOCATIONS 

I  remember  hearing  once  a  colleague  relate  about  his 
experience  of  the  two  different  methods  as  applied  to 
himself.  He  once  sprained  one  of  his  ankles  whilst 
skiing  in  the  Alps,  and  the  Swiss  doctor  who  was  called 
in,  immediately  started  massaging  the  sprain.  A  few 
days  after  he  resumed  his  sport.  Some  three  years 
later  he  sprained  the  other  ankle,  playing  football  in 
England,  but  this  time  he  was,  unfortunately,  put  to  bed 
for  six  weeks,  and  the  result  was  that  he  was  unable 
to  use  his  foot  for  three  months.  This  is  precisely  what 
happens  in  our  work  almost  every  day. 

Of  great  importance  in  these  cases  is  the  right  diag- 
nosis :  if  there  be  any  suspicion  of  a  fracture,  the  sprain 
would  be  better  treated  as  a  fracture  ;  but,  with  the 
X  rays  becoming  more  and  more  popular,  a  radiograph 
can  be  easily  obtained  after  the  injury,  and  this  will 
decide  one  way  or  the  other. 

In  dislocations,  which  differ  from  sprains  only  in  the 
degree  of  damage  done  to  the  joint  apparatus,  greater 
care  should  be  exercised  with  regard  to  the  active  move- 
ments than  need  be  done  in  simple  sprains.  Those 
movements  which  caused  the  dislocation  would  in  the 
beginning  favour  its  recurrence,  and  should  therefore  be 
avoided,  until  all  the  signs  of  the  injury,  such  as  swelling 
and  discoloration,  have  disappeared,  and  all  the  other 
movements  can  be  practised  with  complete  ease. 

One  of  the  commonest  examples  of  this  type  of  injuries 
is  a  sprained  shoulder  joint,  which  requires  the  follow- 
ing treatment.  Stroking  and  kneading  of  the  deltoid 
towards  the  trunk,  as  well  as  stroking  of  the  whole 
arm  right  up  to  the  axilla,  is  carried  out  with  the 


FIG.  18. — A  CASE  OF  SUBCOBACOID  DISLOCATION  OF 
THE  SHOULDER  COMPLICATED  BY  A  FRACTURE  OF 
THE  TUBEROSITIES. 

Before  reduction. 


FIG.  19. — THE  SAME  CASE  AS  FIG.   18,  AFTER  REDUC- 
TION,   ALSO   SHOWING   THE   FRACTURE. 

This  patient,  a  male  typist  of  about  30,  was  discharged  five  weeks  after  the 
accident,  completely  cured. 


[43 


SPRAINED    JOINTS    AND    DISLOCATIONS     43 

object  of  preventing  atrophy  of  the  muscles.  Gradual 
rotation  of  the  humerus  outwards,  until  the  hand  can  be 
easily  put  on  the  back,  and  inwards,  until  the  elbow  can 
be  placed  on  the  middle  of  the  chest,  prevents  the  forma- 
tion of  such  adhesions  which  might  produce  a  limitation 
of  these  two  very  important  movements.  In  a  case  of  a 
simple  sprain,  the  abduction  of  the  arm  must  be  insisted 
upon  from  the  first,  but  this  exercise  must  be  very 
moderate  in  cases  of  subcoracoid  dislocation,  because  an 
extreme  abduction  would  each  time  force  the  head  of 
the  humerus  through  the  rent  in  the  joint  capsule, 
and  thus  favour  the  establishment  of  "  habitual  dis- 
location." 

The  sling  should  not  be  worn  longer  than  three  days, 
its  object  being  only  to  take  the  weight  of  the  arm  off 
the  shoulder  joint  capsule  and  ligaments,  until  the 
effusion  has  begun  to  abate,  which  generally  happens 
within  two  to  three  days.  All  the  movements  should 
be  practised  so  long,  until  the  patient  himself  has 
learned  to  perform  them  within  their  full  range,  and 
without  experiencing  any  pain  whatever.  Should  some 
stiffness  of  the  joint  persist  in  spite  of  that,  this  can 
easily  be  remedied  by  friction  of  the  joint  capsule  at 
places  where  it  is  accessible  to  the  fingers.  The  treat- 
ment can  advantageously  be  given  twice  daily  (Figs. 
18  and  19). 

In  sprains  of  the  elbow  and  of  the  wrist,  great  stress 
should  be  laid  on  good  pronation  and  supination,  as 
these  two  movements  are  usually  impaired.  Massage 
is  given  in  the  usual  way,  consisting  of  stroking  and 
friction,  which  is  chiefly  applied  to  the  radio-humeral 


44     SPRAINED   JOINTS  AND   DISLOCATIONS 

articulation  in  the  elbow,  and  to  the  styloid  processes 
in  the  wrist. 

Sprains  of  the  hip  joint  are  less  easily  influenced  by 
direct  manipulations,  the  joint  being  only  accessible 
in  front.  Movements  should,  therefore,  be  encouraged 
in  all  directions  :  flexion,  rotation,  abduction,  adduction 
(by  crossing  the  legs),  and  extension  are  done  first 
passively,  then  actively,  and  finally  against  resistance. 

In  iliac  dislocation  adduction  is  to  be  avoided ; 
abduction  being  restricted  in  pubic  dislocation. 

The  leg  should  always  be  carefully  measured  in  these 
cases,  this  being  especially  important  then,  when  a 
radiograph  cannot  be  obtained. 

Most  common  are  the  sprains  of  the  knee  joint. 
Sport  and  football  par  excellence,  play  a  prominent 
role  in  the  history  of  injured  knees.  Putting  aside 
cases  of  displaced  or  fractured  semi-lunar  cartilages 
which,  unless  operated  on  first,  are  not  suitable  for 
mechano-therapeutic  treatment,  there  still  remains  a 
large  number  of  cases  which  are  greatly  benefited  by 
mobilisation  and  massage.  The  knee  joint  is  readily 
accessible,  especially  when  distended  by  fluid.  The 
parts  which  may  be  directly  attacked  are  the  upper 
synovial  pouch  above  the  patella,  and  the  two  recesses 
to  both  sides  of  the  knee  cap,  bulging  out  when  fluid 
is  present. 

The  surgeon  places  his  hand  almost  flat  over  the 
swelling,  and  gently  presses  it  upwards,  continuing  the 
movement  as  far  as  the  groin,  and  repeating  this  for  at 
least  twenty  minutes.  Absorption  of  the  fluid  takes 
place  very  rapidly,  so  that  passive  bending  and  stretch- 


SPRAINED  JOINTS  AND  DISLOCATIONS    45 

ing  of  the  leg  can  in  most  cases  be  commenced  on  the 
next  day,  and  on  the  third  day  the  patient  is  told  to  do 
it  himself,  being  only  aided  by  the  surgeon.  In  most 
cases  there  should  be  no  difficulty  in  walking  within 
two  or  three  weeks.  Strapping  or  bandaging  and  still 
less  splinting  of  the  joint  is  hardly  ever  indicated.  If 
some  tender  area  be  revealed  in  the  course  of  treat- 
ment— as  it  sometimes  is  the  case  on  the  inner  aspect 
of  the  knee  or  below  the  patella — they  should  be 
rubbed  and  kneaded.  Flexion  "should  be  carried  out 
in  such  a  manner  as  to  reach  as  soon  as  possible  its 
physiological  limit,  which  can  be  tested  by  comparing 
the  injured  limb  with  the  normal  one,  whilst  the  patient 
is  lying  on  his  face. 

Sprained  ankle  is  undoubtedly  the  most  common 
injury  of  a  joint  met  with  amongst  all  classes  of  people. 
It  is  sometimes  very  difficult  to  differentiate  it  from  a 
Pott's  fracture,  a  useful  guide  in  that  respect  being  the 
exact  localisation  of  pain.  In  Pott's  fracture  the 
greatest  tenderness  is  experienced  just  over  the  tip  of 
the  malleolus,  that  is  over  the  site  of  the  fracture.  In 
a  sprained  ankle  the  pain  is  most  intense  lower  down, 
where  the  ligaments  have  been  ruptured  ;  an  extensive 
swelling,  however,  may  obscure  the  anatomical  picture 
so  as  to  make  this  test  impossible.  Then,  of  course, 
crepitus,  deformity  (mostly  outward  displacement  of 
the  foot),  and  finally  a  skiagraph,  will  help  to  establish 
the  right  diagnosis.  If  an  X-ray  picture  is  not  obtain- 
able, and  doubt  exists  whether  the  case  be  a  simple 
sprain  or  a  fracture,  the  case  should  be  regarded  as  a 
fracture,  and  treated  on  the  lines  indicated  above. 


46    SPRAINED  JOINTS    AND  DISLOCATIONS 

Ordinary  distortions  of  the  ankle  must  under  no  cir- 
cumstances be  immobilised.  The  only  result  of  complete 
and  prolonged  rest  will  be  the  formation  of  adhesions 
in  the  joint,  as  well  as  in  the  surrounding  tendon- 
sheaths,  the  last  practically  always  participating  in 
the  general  effusion.  Massage  is  given  once  or  twice 
a  day,  lasting  each  time  fifteen  to  twenty  minutes,  and 
movements  are  begun  on  the  first  day,  being  quickly 
though  gradually  increased  in  range.  Flexion  and 
extension  of  the  foot  have  to  be  practised  by  the  patient 
himself,  being  particularly  important. 

Massage  ought  to  be  soothing,  not  painful.  The 
swollen  parts  should  be  gently  stroked  upwards,  includ- 
ing the  calf,  right  up  to  the  popliteal  space.  A  more 
detailed  description  of  how  massage  should  be  done 
in  these  cases  was  given  under  Pott's  fracture.  Walking 
is  allowed  on  the  third  day,  cycling  and  every  other 
kind  of  exercise  being  encouraged. 

There  is  one  point  which  ought  to  be  remembered  in 
connection  with  the  treatment  of  fractures  and  sprains 
of  the  lower  extremity,  and  this  is  limping.  Experience 
has  taught  me,  and,  no  doubt,  the  majority  of  the 
profession  will  agree,  that  limping  is  in  most  cases  an 
outcome  of  the  patient's  timidity  in  using  the  injured 
leg.  This,  though  fully  justified  in  the  beginning  of 
the  treatment,  soon  grows  a  habit  difficult  to  eradicate, 
and  therefore  it  should  be  early  counteracted  by  re- 
peatedly drawing  the  patient's  attention  to  the  fact, 
that  there  is  nothing  to  account  for  the  limping. 


CHRONIC  ARTHRITIC  CONDITIONS        47 

C.    CHRONIC   ARTHRITIC   CONDITIONS 

Cases  of  osteo-arthritis  are  generally  benefited  by  gra- 
duated exercises,  if  the  extent  of  the  trouble  does  not 
render  them  too  hopeless.  The  progress  is,  in  most 
cases,  a  very  slow  one,  improvement  being  noticeable 
only  after  some  months  of  treatment.  It  is  the  general 
health  that  ought  to  receive  special  attention,  and  not 
the  condition  of  the  limbs  alone.  More  detail  on  this 
subject  will  be  found  lower  down,  where  constitutional 
diseases  will  be  dealt  with,  since,  in  all  possibilit}^ 
osteo-arthritis  has  to  be  counted  amongst  them. 

The  prognosis  is  much  better  in  patients  who  suffer 
from  articular  stiffness  and  pain,  following  injuries,  such 
as  intra-  and  peri-articular  fractures,  dislocations,  and 
sprains,  when  they  were  not  properly  treated  at  the 
time  being  (traumatic  synovitis).  Most  of  them  have 
adhesions  caused  by  prolonged  immobilisation  and  want 
of  exercises.  If  the  surgeon  is  unable  to  break  them 
down  by  means  of  ordinary  passive  manipulations,  he 
has  to  effect  it  under  general  anaesthesia,  which  is 
followed  by  a  course  of  massage  and  active  exercises, 
necessary  to  strengthen  the  muscles,  often  highly 
atrophied.  In  order  to  render  the  result  of  such  an 
operation  really  satisfactory,  the  surgeon  must  not 
forget  any  movements  possible  in  the  joint,  under 
normal  conditions,  and  moreover  he  should  carry  them 
out  within  their  fullest  range  under  an  anaesthetic. 
Cases  are  often  met  with  where,  for  instance,  only  one 
particular  movement  of  the  arm  is  found  to  be  painful, 
and  only  when  the  patient  attempts  to  reach  for  some 


48        CHRONIC  ARTHRITIC  CONDITIONS 

object,  which  requires  a  complete  action  of  the  joint, 
such  as  buttoning  up  braces  on  the  back,  combing  the 
hair  on  the  back  of  the  head,  putting  on  boots,  or 
taking  a  book  off  the  shelf,  and  the  like.  The  presence 
of  adhesions  as  a  possible  cause  of  such  symptoms  ought 
always  to  be  borne  in  mind,  when  considering  the 
treatment  of  cases  with  a  definite  history  of  a  trauma. 

Operations  of  the  kind  described  must  be  performed 
with  a  light,  yet  a  steady  hand.  The  amount  of  force 
to  be  applied  can  never  be  estimated  beforehand,  but 
it  ought  to  be  just  sufficient  to  sever  the  adhesions 
without  injuring  the  joint  apparatus.  The  best  method 
of  doing  it  is  that  of  slight  jerks,  the  amplitude  of 
which  is  gradually  and  speedily  increased.  This  simple 
procedure,  under  the  name  of  "  bone-setting,"  is 
practised  by  many  quacks,  and  constitutes  the  alpha 
and  omega  of  their  skill. 

Similar  treatment  is  applied  in  cases  of  teno-synovitis, 
which  often  results  in  bad  stiffness,  unless  appropriate 
steps  have  been  taken  at  the  right  moment.  Massage 
and  movements  are  to  be  commenced  as  soon  as  the 
acute  stage  of  teno-synovitis  has  abated.  Should 
incisions  have  been  made,  it  is  wiser  not  to  wait  with 
the  mobilisation  until  the  wound  has  healed  up  com- 
pletely, but  to  carry  out  movements  in  a  warm  anti- 
septic arm  bath,  such  as  boracic  lotion,  a  few  days  after 
the  operation. 

D.    INJURIES   TO   SOFT  PARTS 

Contusions  of  soft  parts,  popularly  called  bruises, 
require  immediate  treatment  by  massage.  Rest  and 


INJURIES  TO  SOFT  PARTS  49 

lotions  have  become  quite  obsolete.  It  is  quite  obvious 
that  besides  numbing  the  pain  for  a  moment,  they 
cannot  have  any  lasting  effect  whatever.  Adhesions 
which  result  from  serous  or  haamorrhagic  effusions  taking 
place  between  muscular  fibres,  are  just  as  injurious  to 
the  function  of  a  muscle  as  they  are  in  a  joint  or  a 
tendon-sheath  to  the  function  of  these  structures.  It 
is  a  well-known  fact  that  the  increase  of  fibrous  tissue 
in  a  muscle  impairs  its  contractility  and  thus  reduces 
its  strength.  Another  fact  about  scars  is  that,  under- 
going a  certain  amount  of  contraction,  they  are  likely 
to  entangle  nerve  filaments.  This  constant  pressure 
and  dragging  on  the  nerves  is  the  cause  of  the  dull 
pain  which  so  frequently  persists  after  injuries  of  soft 
parts. 

Massage  is  carried  out  on  the  first  day  as  painlessly 
as  possible,  and  is  given  with  the  object  of  dispersing 
the  extravasated  blood  or  serum,  and  thus  preventing 
adhesions.  The  swelling  need  not  become  smaller  at 
once,  though  the  discomfort  of  the  patient  may  be 
greatly  reduced  after  the  first  application.  It  is  a  good 
practice  to  commence  massage  with  stroking  of  the 
parts  above  the  bruise,  then  gradually  to  encroach  upon 
the  swelling,  and  finally  to  massage  the  parts  beyond 
it.  Free  exercises  should  be  encouraged  from  the 
first,  and  should  be  particularly  insisted  upon  if  the 
injured  parts  are  situated  near  a  joint  cavity,  or  if 
the  tendon-sheaths  are  involved  in  t  he  injury. 

The  above  method  is  equally  applicable  to  contusions 
of  the  skin   and   subcutaneous   tissues   as   well   as   to 
contusions  of  the  periosteum  itself  :    in  cases  of  a  haema- 
4 


50  INJURIES  TO  SOFT  PARTS 

toma  of  the  periosteum,  the  formation  of  traumatic 
nodes  is  thus  prevented.  The  pain  caused  by  the 
pressure  of  the  effusion  which  raises  the  periosteum  off 
the  bone,  is  often  very  intense,  but  it  is  greatly  alleviated 
by  massage,  which  also  considerably  hastens  the  absorp- 
tion of  the  fluid. 

If  a  sprain  has  been  caused  by  an  over- straining  of  a 
muscle  at  sport  or  at  work,  that  particular  movement 
which  caused  the  injury  is  to  be  avoided  for  a  few  days. 
There  is  a  long  list  of  complaints,  known  under  various 
names  derived  either  from  different  kinds  of  sport, 
or  from  occupations  in  which  they  occur,  such  as 
"  sculler's  sprain/'  the  "  golfer's  back,"  etc.  Massage, 
first  stroking  and  kneading,  then  hacking  and  gentle 
exercises,  constitute  the  treatment  of  these  cases. 

E.    CHRONIC    INFLAMMATORY     CONDITIONS    OP 
SOFT  PARTS 

The  first  place  in  this  group — as  far  as  frequency  of 
occurrence  is  concerned — must  be  given  to  the  condition 
popularly  known  under  the  name  of  muscular  rheuma- 
tism, which,  however,  some  call  fibrositis. 

Though  the  nature  of  this  widespread  complaint  is 
still  somewhat  obscure,  its  treatment  appears  to  be 
well  defined  at  present.  Patients  generally  complain 
of  dull  pain  at  one  or  more  places  of  their  body,  the 
trunk  and  upper  arm  being  chiefly  involved.  Exacer- 
bations of  pain  described  as  being  similar  to  the  pain 
experienced  after  a  bad  bruise  coincide  with  certain 
atmospheric  changes,  such  as  damp  or  windy  weather. 


CHRONIC  INFLAMMATORY  CONDITIONS   51 

The  parts  thus  affected  feel  heavy,  and  if,  for  instance, 
the  arm  be  the  seat  of  the  trouble,  the  patient  may 
become  unable  to  use  it  at  all.  Some  movements  are 
particularly  painful,  such  as  lifting  the  arm  sideways,  or 
upwards,  as  in  combing  hair  or  pouring  out  tea.  There 
is  generally  a  long  history  of  many  similar  attacks, 
usually  called  by  the  patients  attacks  of  rheumatism 
or  neuralgia,  the  pain  being  often  fallaciously  referred 
to  the  nearest  joint,  most  frequently  to  the  elbow  and 
the  shoulder  joints. 

Clinically,  on  examination,  one  finds  that  the  pain 
can  nearly  always  be  localised.  In  the  case  of  pain 
in  the  shoulder,  the  greatest  tenderness  is  elicited  by 


FIG.  20. — FORCIBLE  KNEADING 

OF  THE  ELBOW  REGION. 
*  Note  the  position  of  the  thumbs. 

pressure  on  some  parts  of  the  deltoid.  Should  pain  in 
the  elbow  be  complained  of,  the  tendon  of  the  triceps 
or  the  supinators  are  found  to  be  tender.  The  move- 
ments in  these  joints  are  quite  painless  when  carried 
out  passively  by  the  surgeon.  Very  careful  examina- 
tion by  well-trained  hands  reveals  areas  which  feel 
slightly  firmer  than  healthy  muscular  tissue  does.  If, 
however,  great  pressure  is  applied  to  them,  which  can 
be  done  by  placing  both  thumbs  one  on  top  of  the 


52     CHRONIC  INFLAMMATORY  CONDITIONS 

other  (Fig.  20),  these  areas  pit,  like  an  old  chronic 
oedema.  The  pain  is  only  bad  at  the  commence- 
ment of  pressure,  but  is  generally  relieved  a  few 
moments  after. 

Pathologically,  little  change  can  be  found  to  explain 
the  comparatively  well  marked  clinical  disturbances. 
Serous,  sometimes  cellular,  infiltrations  of  muscles  have 
been  described  as  the  only  findings  in  these  cases. 
The  pain  must  therefore  be  attributed  to  pressure  on 
nerve  endings,  caused  by  serous  exudation.  If  after 
a  time  a  certain  amount  of  fibrosis  takes  place,  the 
complaint  becomes  still  more  tedious,  and  hard  nodules 
may  then  be  felt  along  the  muscles,  fasciae,  and  tendons, 
likened  by  some  authors  to  rows  of  beads.  They  are 
often  encountered  in  the  cervical  region  in  the  trapezii 
and  the  sterno-mastoids.  Situated  near  the  exit  of  the 
occipital  nerves,  they  give  rise  to  occipital  headache 
(see  chapter  on  headache,  under  Neuralgia). 

Torticollis  is  often  produced  in  the  same  way  through 
an  irritation  of  the  spinal  accessory  nerve. 

Lumbago  may  persist  as  long  as  the  lumbar  nerves 
are  pressed  upon  by  the  infiltrations  occurring  in  the 
quadratus  lumborum. 

Sciatica  is  just  as  frequently  caused  by  the  same 
kind  of  changes  in  the  glutaei,  which,  however,  is  a 
fact  not  often  recognised. 

All  cases  of  fibrositis  are  greatly  benefited  by  a  course 
of  massage,  which  should  consist  of  a  very  vigorous 
kneading  of  the  parts  affected.  Deep  and  forcible  pres- 
sure should  be  exercised  on  the  infiltrated  areas  in 
order  to  bring  about  the  absorption  of  the  inflammatory 


CHRONIC  INFLAMMATORY  CONDITIONS     53 

products.  This  is  best  done  by  grasping  the  limb 
with  both  hands,  and  placing  both  thumbs  on  the 
painful  spot.  In  these  cases  it  is  advisable  to  use  an 
electric  vibrator,  with  a  small  rubber  applicator,  as 
manual  treatment  may  become  rather  fatiguing, 
especially  if  different  parts  require  similar  treatment. 
Hacking  and  stroking  are  here  useful  adjuvants,  and 
help  the  circulation  to  eliminate  the  waste  products. 
As  the  surrounding  muscles  are  more  or  less  weakened 
through  the  patient  not  using  them  properly  on 
account  of  pain — exercises  in  all  directions  should  be 
encouraged.  Slight  exacerbations  of  pain  are  not 
uncommon  in  the  beginning  of  the  treatment,  which 
has  to  be  applied  daily,  during  four  to  six  weeks  on 
an  average.  Some  patients  find  also  the  application 
of  heat  very  soothing,  such  as  hot  poultices  or  radiant 
heat.  Others,  however,  cannot  bear  it  at  all. 

Massage  has  unfortunately  been  seldom  adopted  in 
ulcers.  Chronic  ulcers,  resulting,  or  favoured  by  a 
torpid  circulation,  as  in  the  case  of  varicose  veins,  or 
originating  from  traumatic  and  thermic  causes  in  anaemic 
subjects,1  are  all  cases  which  obviously  require  stimula- 
tion of  the  parts  thus  affected.  If  we  succeed  in 
relieving  the  venous  stasis,  we  necessarily  benefit  the 
ulcer,  as  in  that  way  we  influence  the  nutrition  of 
tissues.  The  affected  limb — which  is  in  most  cases 
the  lower  extremity — should  to  this  effect  be  kept 
elevated  during  the  best  part  of  the  day  and  the  night. 
The  vicinity  of  the  ulcer,  which  is  always  very  painful, 

1  To  this  class  the  complaint  known  under  the  name  of 
Raynaud 'a  disease  belongs. 


54    CHRONIC  INFLAMMATORY  CONDITIONS 

— especially  the  parts  beyond  it — is  gently  stroked 
towards  the  trunk  of  the  patient,  thus  emptying  all  the 
veins  and  lymphatics. 

To  rub  the  ulcer  itself,  though  advocated  by  some 
authors,  is  not  commended  on  account  of  the  great 
tenderness,  and  the  risk  of  destroying  the  granulations. 
This  may,  however,  be  tried  as  a  preliminary  step 
carried  out  once  in  the  beginning  of  the  treatment,  as 
an  alternative  to  scraping  or  curetting.  In  such  a 
case  the  surface  of  the  sore  is  covered  with  a  piece  of 
boracic  lint,  and  the  thumbs  are  placed  on  top  of  it. 

The  prevention  of  bed-sores  is  so  important  that  it 
need  hardly  be  emphasised.  It  should  become  a 
routine  measure  that  in  all  cases  of  long  illness  the 
prominent  points,  such  as  the  scapulae,  sacrum,  and 
the  heels,  should  be  inspected  every  day,  and  long 
before  any  signs  of  sores  appear,  these  parts  should 
be  submitted  to  a  daily  friction  with  such  stimulants 
as  methylated,  or  pure  spirits  of  wine.  The  general 
application  of  mechano- therapeutics  in  such  cases  will 
be  considered  later,  when  the  treatment  of  debility 
is  discussed. 

There  is  one  more  trouble  belonging  to  the  inflam- 
matory conditions  of  soft  parts  to  be  mentioned,  and 
this  is  catarrhal  prostatitis,  one  of  the  most  troublesome 
complaints  known.  It  is  very  little  influenced  by  the 
ordinary  methods,  and  it  runs  a  very  chronic  course. 
It  thus  becomes  most  tedious  to  both  the  surgeon  and 
the  patient.  The  latter  becomes  affected  physically,  as 
well  as  psychically,  if  the  prostatorrosa  is  not  radically 
attacked  by  means  of  rectal  massage. 


CHRONIC  INFLAMMATORY  CONDITIONS    55 

The  patient  is  placed  in  the  knee-elbow  position. 
The  index  finger,  protected  by  a  rubber  finger-stall, 
and  lubricated  with  some  indifferent  ointment,  is 
introduced  into  the  rectum.  The  prostate  in  these 
cases  is  generally  found  to  be  enlarged  and  granulated. 
The  treatment  consists  of  gentle  stroking  manipulations 
in  a  downward  and  forward  direction,  and  is  carried 
out  with  the  pulpy  part  of  the  finger,  so  as  not  to 
injure  the  rectal  mucous  membrane.  This  is  carried 
out  once  or  twice  a  week,  and  it  is  followed  by  an 
immediate  improvement.  After  each  sitting,  a  con- 
siderable amount  of  thick  milky  fluid  escapes  from 
the  urethra.  Within  a  few  weeks  of  regular  treatment 
the  size  of  the  prostate  is  found  diminished,  and  the 
amount  of  discharge  considerably  lessened,  or  completely 
arrested.  Massage  acts  here  as  a  stimulant  to  the 
glandular  tissue  by  emptying  its  secretion  and  supply- 
ing it  with  fresh  blood  instead.  This  can  hardly  be 
achieved  by  any  other  means,  owing  to  the  inaccessible 
situation  of  this  gland. 

F.    DEFORMITIES 

The  deformity  most  frequently  observed  in  general 
practice  is  scoliosis.  Probably  a  hundred  per  cent,  more 
cases  would  come  under  observation  if  every  young 
subject  complaining  of  pain  in  the  back  and  general 
weakness  were  stripped  at  the  first  consultation,  and 
thoroughly  examined.  If  this  routine  measure  were 
carried  out  conscientiously  by  every  medical  man  in 
the  country,  the  incurable  hunchbacks  would  disappear 


56  DEFORMITIES 

in  less  than  a  quarter  of  a  century.  Ninety-nine  per 
cent,  of  all  curvatures  could  be  prevented  or  cured,  if 
attacked  early,  before  gross  bony  changes  had  taken 
place.  The  age  of  eight  to  twelve  is  most  commonly  the 
time  when  the  trouble  begins,  many  more  girls  being 
affected  than  boys.  Their  relation  varies  between  5*1, 
and  9*1  (see  the  author's  "  Spinal  Deformity  in 
Schoolgirls,"  School  Hygiene,  February  1914). 

It  would  go  far  beyond  the  scope  of  this  book  to 
discuss  the  various  theories  of  the  formation  of  spinal 
curvatures.  Our  object  here  is  only  to  state  how  far, 
and  in  what  way,  mechano-therapy  in  general  practice 
is  applicable  to  these  cases,  and  what  good  it  may  be 
expected  to  do. 

Assuming  that  scoliosis  nearly  always,  and  in  the 
first  place,  is  due  to  weakness  of  the  whole  frame  or 
its  parts,  such  as  bones,  muscles,  and  ligaments,  other 
factors,  such  as  weight  and  faulty  position,  playing 
only  a  subaltern  role,  all  our  efforts  must  be  directed 
towards  the  strengthening  of  the  spinal  apparatus. 

We  have  three  ways  of  doing  this  by  mechanical 
means :  exercises,  massage,  and  appliances.  These 
factors  should  never  be  used  separately,  though  the 
last-named  one  may  often  be  left  off  altogether  ;  their 
combination,  however,  depends  on  the  kind  of  the 
case  under  treatment.  Slight  cases,  with  little  de- 
formity and  little  subjective  symptoms,  such  as  pain  or 
fatigue,  do  well  with  exercises  given  mainly,  massage 
being  used  as  an  adjuvant.  Those  cases  in  which  sub- 
jective complaints  are  predominant  require  chiefly 
massage,  exercises  being  administered  very  cautiously. 


DEFORMITIES  57 

Very  advanced  cases,  with  a  great  amount  of  deformity, 
pain,  and  respiratory  and  circulatory  disturbances,  obtain 
considerable  relief  from  supportive  jackets,  worn  during 
the  daytime.  Massage  is  employed  here  as  in  all  other 
cases,  and  exercises,  mostly  passive  ones,  are  directed 
towards  improving  the  circulation,  as  well  as  respiration. 
Massage  of  the  back  consists  of  stroking,  kneading, 
and  hacking.  Stroking  movements  are  carried  out  in 
three  stages  :  along  the  upper  part  of  the  trapezius, 
from  the  back  of  the  neck  towards  the  shoulders  ;  along 
the  lower  part  of  the  same  muscle  from  the  shoulders 
towards  the  loins ;  and  finally  along  the  latissimus 
dorsi  from  the  axilla  down  to  the  iliac  crests.  Both 


FIG.  21. — KNEADING  OF 
THE  TRAPEZIUS. 

hands  are  employed  at  the  same  time,  each  of  them 
massaging  the  corresponding  side.  Kneading  is  done 
by  placing  the  hands  flat  on  the  patient's  back,  and 
moving  the  skin  over  the  muscles  ;  the  hands  are  not 
moved  over  the  skin,  as  is  the  case  in  stroking.  The 
upper  part  of  the  trapezius  being  accessible  to  the 


58  DEFORMITIES 

fingers  is  pinched  up,  and  kneaded  in  the  ordinary  way 
(Fig.  21).  Hacking  is  very  useful  as  a  means  of  stimu- 
lating the  erectores  spinse,  and  is  best  carried  out  trans- 
versely to  the  course  of  these  muscles. 

It  is  necessary  to  devote  at  least  five  minutes  to 
these  manipulations  each  time.  In  cases  where  massage 
chiefly  is  indicated,  these  sittings  should,  of  course, 
last  longer,  fifteen  to  twenty  minutes  being  an  average. 
The  patient  lies  on  a  couch,  his  back  being  exposed ; 
the  person  administering  massage  is  standing  or  sitting 
by,  facing  the  upper  part  of  the  patient's  body.  When 
combined  with  exercises,  massage  is  given  during  the 
rest  pauses,  which  must  necessarily  be  made  in  these 
cases. 

With  regard  to  exercises  we  may  point  out  that  their 
object  is  a  threefold  one.  Firstly,  loosening  of  liga- 
ments and  stretching  of  the  shortened  muscles  on  the 
concave  side  of  the  deformity.  Secondly,  correcting 
the  deformity  itself.  Thirdly,  teaching  the  patient 
what  the  normal  position  of  his  spine  ought  to  be,  and 
how  to  maintain  it. 

It  would  be  almost  impossible  to  give  a  complete  list 
of  exercises  to  be  practised  by  scoliotic  patients,  but 
it  may  be  accepted  as  a  general  rule  that  any  move- 
ment of  the  body,  no  matter  whether  a  passive  or  an 
active  one,  tending  to  undo  the  curve,  is  of  value,  and 
may  be  used  as  an  exercise. 

Movements  are  often  combined  with  different  atti- 
tudes of  the  body,  and  more  complicated  movements 
may  be  constructed  out  of  two  or  three  simple  ones, 
thus  offering  us  an  unlimited  variety  to  choose  from. 


DEFORMITIES  59 

Out  of  this  large  number  we  select  a  few  exercises 
especially  suited  for  the  particular  case  under  treat- 
ment, and  we  carry  them  out  every  day,  increasing  their 
amount  gradually.  They  all  must  be  performed  slowly, 
the  fullest  attention  of  the  patient  and  the  surgeon 
being  concentrated  on  them  all  the  time.  They  should 
be  carried  out  within  their  widest  range,  that  is  to  say 
as  far  as  the  anatomical  barriers  permit.  The  number 
of  times  each  movement  should  be  practised  varies  so 
much  in  every  case  according  -to  the  amount  of  energy 
possessed  or  spent  on  other  exercises,  that  it  cannot 
be  fixed  beforehand.  We  generally  begin  with  six,  and 
increase  the  number  up  to  twelve,  but  there  is  no 
reason  why  certain  patients  should  not  perform  twice 
as  many. 

There  is  only  one  factor  that  must  be  punctiliously 
observed,  and  that  is  fatigue.  The  moment  we  notice 
that  the  patient  fails  to  carry  out  the  movements  with 
his  usual  alacrity  and  precision,  the  exercises  must  be 
interrupted,  and  a  rest  period  of  five  minutes  interposed, 
during  which  massage  is  employed.  Some  of  the 
commoner  signs  of  fatigue  are  swaying  of  the  body, 
or  changes  of  the  rhythm  with  which  the  exercises 
are  usually  practised  :  patients  first  hurry,  and  then 
slow  down  and  tumble.  Another  sign  of  fatigue  is  a 
faulty  respiration,  which  ought  to  be  closely  observed 
throughout  the  treatment.  The  expression  of  the 
patient's  face  should  be  carefully  watched,  as  it  often 
indicates  the  moment  of  his  exhaustion. 

Passing  now  to  the  description  of  individual  exercises, 
we  shall  consider  more  fully  only  those  which  are 


60  DEFORMITIES 

applicable  to  cases  of  right  dorsal  curve,  this  being  the 
commonest  type  of  scoliosis.  Eor  cases  of  left  dorsal 
curve  all  movements  should  be  reversed. 

The  patients  start  with  simple  exercises,  and  are  very 
gradually  taught  to  do  more  complicated  ones.  To  the 
simple  exercises  belongs  "  sitting  side  bending  "  of  the 
trunk  towards  the  convexity  of  the  curve,  which  in  our 
case  will  always  be  the  right  one.  The  patient  sits 
either  on  a  high  plinth,  his  legs  strapped  down  to  it, 
or  on  an  ordinary  stool,  his  feet  twisted  round  the 
legs  of  the  stool,  so  as  to  add  more  to  his  security.  He 
places  both  his  hands  on  the  back  of  his  head,  expanding 
his  chest,  and  raising  his  chin.  The  side  bending 
movement  is  carried  out  slowly,  and  the  respiration  is 
watched.  Bending  and  raising  of  the  trunk  to  the 
original  position  should  occupy  at  least  ten  seconds 
altogether,  a  slight  pause  being  made  before  the  exercise 
is  repeated.  One  ought  to  reckon  one  minute  for 
every  four  movements,  and  three  minutes  for  a  dozen. 
This  exercise  can  be  rendered  stronger,  that  is  of  more 
effect  on  the  spine,  if  the  surgeon  places  his  right  hand 
on  the  convexity,  and  his  left  hand  under  the  patient's 
left  elbow  (or  under  his  arm),  thus  assisting  in  the 
flexion  of  the  trunk  (Figs.  22  and  23). 

Another  useful  exercise  is  "  sitting  forward  bending  " 
of  the  trunk,  which  can  be  done  without  the  patient 
changing  his  former  sitting  position.  The  patient  lifts 
his  left  arm  straight  up  in  one  line  with  the  spine,  and 
places  his  right  hand  on  the  convexity  of  the  curve, 
the  thumb  looking  backward.  The  right  hand  exercises 
pressure  on  the  curve,  and  the  left  arm  is  forcibly 


II 


H   fc 
H   O 


s'S 


*Is 


DEFORMITIES  61 

stretched  out,  thus  rotating  the  shoulder,  which  pulls 
the  spine  over  to  the  left  side.  The  surgeon  helps  to 
correct  the  deformity  by  grasping  the  patient's  left  hand 


FIG.  24. — THE  SAME  CASE  AS  FIGS.  22  AND 
23.  "  FOBWABD  BENDING  "  :  SITTING, 
WITH  PRESSURE  ON  THE  CONVEXITY  AND 
TRACTION  OF  THE  LEFT  ARM. 

above  the  wrist  joint  with  his  left,  and  placing  his 
right  hand  on  or  above  the  patient's  right,  which  is 
pressing  on  the  "  hump."  The  surgeon  pulls  the 
patient's  arm  upwards  and  at  the  same  time  exercises 


62  DEFORMITIES 

pressure  on  the  curve  (Fig.  24),  especially  at  the  moment 
when  the  patient  begins  to  raise  his  trunk  to  the  original 
position.  Full  expiration  is  made  during  flexion,  and 
a  deep  inspiration  during  extension  of  the  spine. 

"  Crawling  exercises  " — introduced  by  Professor  Ru- 
dolph Klapp — have  the  great  advantage  of  correcting 
the  deformity,  whilst  the  weight  of  the  body  is  taken 
off  the  spine.     The  patient  crouches  on  all  his  fours 
in  such  a  manner  as  to  keep  both  his  right  extremities 
as  close  to  each  other  as  possible  ;    the  left  leg  and  the 
left    arm,    however,    are    stretched    out.     The   patient 
performs  crawling  movement  in  as  small  a  circle  as 
possible,   all  the  time  endeavouring  to  maintain  the 
same  relation  of  his  limbs.     The  hands  are  protected 
by  gloves,    and   the   knees   are   wrapped   up   in  some 
flannel.     Also  small  square  pieces  of  thick  felt  may  be 
fixed  to  the  parts  exposed  to  pressure  by  means  of  an 
elastic  bandage.     The  left  arm  has  to  make  far-reaching 
movements  forward,   and  the  left  leg  has  to  remain 
far  behind  its  fellow.     The  patient  moves  along  only 
in  the  direction  of  the  curvature,  so  that  if  it  is  a  case 
of  right  dorsal  curve,  the  direction  is  identical  with 
that  of  the  hands  of  a  clock.     Left  dorsal  curve  becomes 
straightened  out  through  the  reverse.     Crawling  exer- 
cises are  to  be  practised  by  the  patients  at  home  for 
at  least  fifteen  minutes,  night  and  morning. 

A  double  curve  or  S-scoliosis  requires  a  different 
arrangement  of  the  limbs,  which  in  that  case  must  be 
stretched  out  crossways  :  the  right  arm  and  the  left  leg 
or  vice  versa. 

"  Side  lying  "  on  the  side  of  the  concavity  is  a  posi- 


DEFORMITIES  63 

tion  in  which  the  weight  of  the  body  is  used  as  the 
correcting  factor.  This  posture  should  be  habitually 
assumed  by  the  patients  when  resting,  or  even  when 
sleeping.  The  real  advantage  of  this  correcting  position 
is  that  it  influences  the  spine  during  a  great  part  of 
the  day. 

If  compensatory  curves  have  already  developed 
markedly,  combined  movements  are  of  more  use  than 
simple  ones.  For  instance,  in  the  case  of  right  dorsal 
curvature,  the  compensatory  curves  being  left  lumbar 
and  left  cervical,  I  find  the  following  exercise  very 
useful. 

The  patient  places  both  hands  on  the  back  of  the 
head,  which  is  kept  bent  to  the  left,  thus  undoing  the 
cervical  curve.  The  legs  are  kept  wide  apart,  and  the 
weight  of  the  body  is  thrown  on  the  right  foot,  thus 
undoing  the  lumbar  curve.  The  right  knee  is  now 
bent,  and  at  the  same  time  the  spine  flexed  to  the 
right,  the  dorsal  curve  being  thus  undone.  Rotation 
of  the  vertebras,  always  present  in  more  advanced 
cases,  is  overcome  by  a  slight  twist  of  the  trunk  towards 
the  convexity,  achieved  by  the  patient  facing  his 
right  knee,  when  bending  over  it.  In  this  way  a  treble 
curve  is  corrected  by  one  exercise,  which,  though  rather 
complicated,  is  easily  learnt  by  degrees. 

Extension  and  flexion  of  the  arms  forward  and  side- 
ways in  standing  or  sitting,  with  the  spine  held  in  a 
correct  position,  help  the  patient  to  train  his  muscular 
sensation,  and  to  get  accustomed  to  perform  the  every- 
day movements  in  a  good  erect  posture. 

"  Side  hanging  "  is  a  powerful  means  of  correcting 


64  DEFORMITIES 

spinal  curvature  in  the  dorsal  region.  The  patient  is 
placed  with  his  convex  side  right  across  a  well-padded 
boom,  the  head  and  the  legs  being  slightly  supported 
by  the  surgeon.  If  the  person  treated  is  a  child,  which 
is  mostly  the  case,  any  soft  object,  such  as  the  back  of 
a  sofa  or  that  of  an  easy  chair,  will  do  for  this  purpose. 
Care  must  be  taken  lest  the  deformity  should  become 
aggravated  by  compressing  the  ribs.  It  should,  there- 
fore, be  remembered  that  pressure  is  to  be  applied  to 
the  top  of  the  "  hump,"  and  not  to  the  parts  beyond  it. 

These  aie  just  a  few  examples  of  spinal  exercises 
which  can  easily  be  applied  to  the  typical  cases  of 
total  or  C-scoliosis  in  general  practice.  Most  cases  of 
slight  curvature  can  be  cured,  if  treated  by  the  above 
exercises  alone. 

The  following  are  a  few  class  exercises,  that  is  exercises 
which  can  be  done  by  several  patients  together.  They 
are  suitable  in  very  slight  cases  showing  just  the  be- 
ginning of  a  deformity,  and  can,  of  course,  be  combined 
with  the  above-mentioned  ones.  In  all  of  them  great 
stress  is  laid  on  deep  respiration  and  on  the  correct 
position  of  the  shoulders  as  well  as  of  the  rest  of  the  body. 

Standing  arms  parting  ; 

Standing  arms  stretching  upwards,  sideways  and 
downwards  ; 

Heels  raising  and  knee  bending,  with  hands  on  the 
hips; 

Knee  up-bending  (alternately),  with  hands  on  the 
hips ; 

Standing  arms  circling  ; 

Standing  arms  flinging ; 


DEFORMITIES  G5 

Standing  arms  rotating  outwards,  head  extending. 

Advanced  cases  of  scoliosis  require  special  attention, 
and  celluloid  jackets  are  often  necessary  in  order  to 
reduce  a  certain  amount  of  deformity  and  compression 
of  the  viscera.  Simple  celluloid  jackets  can  be  made 
by  any  medical  man  without  difficulty.  The  main  part 
of  the  work  is  the  cast.  First,  a  negative  is  obtained 
of  the  patient's  back.  This  is  done  by  putting  several 
layers  of  plaster  of-Paris  bandages  on  the  extended 
back,  and  cutting  them  open  at  one  side.  The  body 
has  been  previously  well  anointed  with  vaseline.  A 
bottom  is  made  to  the  negative,  and  another  bandage 
carried  round  the  whole,  so  as  to  close  all  the  rents, 
and  thus  to  prevent  leakage.  As  soon  as  it  is  dry,  it 
is  well  rubbed  with  some  grease  inside,  and  filled  with 
plaster-of-Paris.  In  a  day  or  two  the  negative  is  cut 
open  again,  and  the  positive  taken  out.  The  cast  thus 
obtained  represents  the  patient's  back  in  a  corrected 
position.  On  this  model,  first  a  woollen  vest  is  placed. 
On  top  of  that  a  layer  of  book  muslin  is  wrapped  round. 
This  has  to  be  previously  cut  up  into  strips  of  about 
a  yard  in  length,  and  about  six  inches  wide,  because 
this  facilitates  the  shaping  of  the  jacket.  The  muslin 
thus  prepared,  and  placed  on  the  cast,  is  painted  over 
with  a  solution  of  celluloid  in  acetone.  As  soon  as 
this  gets  dry — which  takes  place  in  a  few  hours — 
another  layer  of  muslin  is  wound  round  the  first  layer, 
and  painted  again.  In  such  a  manner  about  a  dozen 
or  more  layers  of  muslin  and  celluloid  are  placed  on 
top  of  each  other.  When  perfectly  dry,  the  jacket  is 
cut  open  in  front.  Leather  straps  and  buckles  are  fixed 
5 


66 


DEFORMITIES 


to  it  after  it  has  been  removed  from  the  cast,  and  small 
pads  of  cotton  wool  fastened  to  those  points  inside  the 
jacket  which  are  in  contact  with  such  prominent  parts 
as  the  sacrum  and  the  top  of  the  curvature.  If  the 
deformity  is  very  marked  the  jacket  should  be  applied 
in  a  recumbent  position  by  the  patient  himself. 


FIG.  25. — BREATHING  EXERCISES  IN  LYING. 

Photograph  shows  the  moment  of  deepest  inspiration  and  maximum  extension 
of  the  arms. 

Celluloid  can  be  made  non-inflammable  through  the 
addition  of  certain  salts. 

Respiration  is  generally  very  defective  in  scoliotic 
subjects  ;  therefore  special  respiratory  movements  should 
be  practised  every  day,  at  the  beginning  of  each  sitting. 
The  following  movement  is  very  useful  because  it  com- 
bines expansion  of  the  chest  with  stretching  of  the  spine. 

The  patient  is  lying  on  his  back,  his  hands  by  his 


DEFORMITIES  67 

sides,  the  surgeon  sitting  beyond  the  patient's  head 
holds  both  the  patient's  hands  in  his  own  corresponding 
ones.  The  surgeon  gradually  draws  the  patient's 
arms  upwards,  whilst  the  latter  is  told  to  take  a  deep 
breath.  Having  reached  the  limit  of  extension,  the 
surgeon  ceases  to  exercise  traction  on  the  arms,  and 
the  patient  begins  now  to  draw  the  surgeon's  hands 
downwards  to  the  original  position.  Full  expiration  is 
made  during  this  period.  Both  these  movements  have 
to  be  carried  out,  as  far  as  possible,  in  the  plane  of  the 
body  of  the  patient,  who  must  be  told  to  keep  his  elbows 
all  the  time  in  contact  with  the  couch.  The  whole 
movement  is  repeated  about  a  dozen  times.  As  the 
patient  gains  strength,  this  exercise  is  gradually  rendered 
more  difficult  by  adding  resistance  on  the  part  of  the 
surgeon,  and  by  allowing  the  patient's  legs  to  hang 
over  the  foot  end  of  the  couch,  thus  increasing  the 
extension  of  the  spine  (Fig.  25). 

The  last-named  exercise  is  also  very  helpful  in  the 
treatment  of  kyphosis  or  round  shoulders,  especially 
when  slightly  modified.  One  or  two  cushions  placed 
just  under  the  most  prominent  part  of  the  spine,  and 
acting  thus  as  a  fulcrum,  considerably  increase  the 
extension  of  the  vertebral  column.  This,  however, 
must  be  done  with  caution,  so  as  not  to  cause  any  pain 
or  discomfort.  Similar  exercises  are  given  in  sitting 
posture,  the  back  of  the  patient  resting  against  the 
surgeon's  knee.  "  Sitting  flexion  and  extension "  of 
the  trunk,  with  the  patient's  hands  placed  either 
on  his  hips  or  on  the  back  of  his  head,  ought  to  be 
always  done  with  a  certain  amount  of  resistance 


68  DEFORMITIES 

applied  to  the  "hump."  Swimming  movements  are 
generally  very  useful,  especially  if  accompanied  by 
deep  breathing. 

A  point  of  great  importance  in  all  these  exercises  is 
the  carriage  of  the  head.  The  patient  must  be  constantly 
reminded  to  lift  his  head  up  as  high  as  he  can,  because 
only  then  a  deep  inspiration  can  be  made,  and  a  proper 
expansion  of  the  thorax  take  place. 

Cases  of  kypho- scoliosis  will  of  course  require  a  com- 
bination of  both  kinds  of  exercises,  described  under 
scoliosis  and  kyphosis. 

It  is  taken  for  granted  that  in  all  cases  in  which 
scoliosis  is  due  to  an  inequality  of  the  lower  extremities 
(with  regard  to  their  length),  the  shorter  leg  will  be 
lengthened,  either  by  a  thickening  of  the  sole  of  the  boot 
outside,  or  by  an  elevator  inside,  or  both.  As  it  was 
repeatedly  found  that  a  large  percentage  of  scoliosis 
cases  is  caused  by  often  very  trivial  differences  of  the 
legs,  every  case  of  spinal  curvature  should  be  carefully 
examined  in  this  respect  in  the  beginning  of  the  treat- 
ment. 

Spinal  deformities  originating  from  an  empyema 
especially  require  breathing  exercises. 

Genu  valgum  as  well  as  genu  varum  in  children  under 
the  age  of  six  to  seven  are  to  a  great  extent  amenable 
to  mechanic  treatment.  The  application  of  splints  alone 
is  never  satisfactory,  as  it  only  helps  to  weaken  the 
limbs,  favouring  atrophy  of  the  muscles.  Although  it 
is  very  important  indeed  not  to  allow  rickety  children 
to  run  about,  yet  it  would  be  a  great  mistake  not  to 
give  them  any  exercises  instead.  Active  movements 


DEFORMITIES  69 

cannot  always  be  carried  out  properly  by  children  of 
that  age,  so  that  passive  ones  have  to  be  chiefly  relied 
upon.  Besides  flexion  and  extension  of  the  knee, 
special  movements  tending  to  undo  the  deformity  are 
practised  night  and  morning.  The  child's  thigh  is 
grasped  with  one  hand,  and  the  leg  with  the  other,  and 
bending  as  well  as  stretching  movements  are  carried 
out,  whilst  an  attempt  is  made  to  straighten  out  the 
curve.  By  such  manipulations  the  ligaments  become 
loosened  on  the  concave  side,  and  the  soft  cartilage, 
covering  the  bone  ends,  undergoes  a  transformation 
which  is  necessary  to  correct  the  faulty  architecture  of 
the  joint.  General  application  of  mechano-therapeutic 
measures  in  such  cases  will  be  considered  lower  down 
under  rickets,  in  the  chapter  on  constitutional  diseases. 
Knock-knee  and  bow-legs  in  adolescents  are  past  that 
stage  at  which  softness  of  the  structures  would  permit 
of  a  bloodless  correction.  But  if  an  operation  has 
been  carried  out,  massage  should  be  employed  from 
the  first,  and  movements  carried  out  in  the  knee  joints 
should  follow  within  a  few  days.  Otherwise  great 
stiffness  will  result.  The  same  applies  to  such  an 
operation  as  the  subtrochanteric  osteotomy,  performed 
for  the  correction  of  coxa  vara.  A  case  of  this  kind 
in  which  massage  and  movements  were  only  adopted 
six  weeks  after  the  operation  taught  me  how  unwise 
it  is  to  immobilise  the  whole  extremity  for  so  long  a 
period.  The  patient's  knee  became  so  stiff  and  painful 
that  one  might  have  thought  it  was  Macewen's  opera- 
tion, and  not  a  subtrochanteric  division  of  the  femur 
that  had  been  performed  in  this  case. 


70  DEFORMITIES 

The  importance  of  early  movements  after  Murphy's 
arthro- plastic  operation  or  after  joint  excisions  is,  I 
think,  obvious  enough,  so  as  to  render  all  further  explana- 
tions superfluous.  Mobilisation  of  limbs  must,  however, 
take  place  a  few  days  after  the  operation,  if  it  is  to 
be  of  any  use  whatever. 

A  very  common  complaint  is  flat  foot.  If  every 
medical  man  could  take  the  trouble  to  examine  all  his 
patients  who  suffer  from  pains  in  the  feet,  he  would 
find  that  99  per  cent,  of  them  represent  flat  feet  of  some 
kind  or  other.  Mostly  it  is  the  first  or  second  stage  of 
pes  planus  that  the  general  practitioner  has  to  deal 
with.  And  it  is  just  these  two  first  stages  that  can 
be  cured  by  exercises  alone. 

The  first  stage  is  pain  without  deformity.  The  second 
stage  is  pain  plus  deformity,  which,  however,  can  be 
corrected  by  manipulations  of  the  surgeon.  In  the 
third  stage  deformity  can  only  be  corrected  by  great 
force  under  anaesthesia. 

There  are  two  kinds  of  exercises  for  flat  foot.  Some 
may  be  practised  by  the  patients  at  home,  the  others 
require  assistance  of  the  surgeon.  Patients  ought  to 
make  it  a  rule  to  put  their  feet  parallel  when  walking, 
and  not  to  evert  them,  as  most  people  do.  This  is  one 
of  the  first  causes  of  flat  feet,  probably  provoked,  or 
favoured,  by  ill-fitting  shoes.  Peasants  in  certain  coun- 
tries of  Europe,  for  instance  in  Poland,  who  never  wear 
boots  except  on  rare  occasions,  always  place  their  feet 
parallel,  and  flat  foot  is  scarcely  at  all  known  amongst 
them.  The  same  is  reported  of  natives  in  tropical  lands. 

Besides  following  the  example  of  primitive  people  in 


DEFORMITIES 


71 


this  respect,  flat-footed  patients  should  practise  walking 
round  the  room  on  the  outer  border  of  their  feet,  heels 
raised  off  the  ground,  until  they  get  tired  (Fig.  26). 


FIG.  26. — WALKING  ON  THE  OUTER 
BORDER  OF  THE  FEET,  HEEI.S 
BEING  RAISED  OFF  THE  GROUND. 

Tip-toeing,  with  heels  kept  wide  apart,  and  the  toes 
turned  in,  should  be  repeated  at  least  twelve  to  twenty- 
four  times,  morning  and  evening  (see  Fig.  16).  This 
can  be  modified  and  rendered  more  difficult]  by  not 
allowing  the  patient  to  touch  the  ground  with  his  heels. 
Lifting  oneself  up  on  the  outer  borders  of  the  feet 
without  letting  one's  heels  touch  the  ground  is  equally 
good. 

Apart  from  these  very  important  exercises,  patients 
have  to  perform  movements  with  their  feet  in  all 
directions  except  one.  Flexion,  extension,  adduction, 
and  circumduction,  are  carried  out  first  without,  then 
with,  resistance  ;  abduction,  however,  is  left  out  on 
account  of  its  favouring  the  flattening  of  the  foot.  Resis- 
tance is  effected  by  the  surgeon's  hands,  one  of  which 
grasps  the  leg  just  above  the  ankle,  and  the  other  across 
the  metatarsals. 

Massage  in  these  cases  consists  of  stroking  of  the 


72  DEFORMITIES 

calf  of  the  leg  upward,  as  well  as  of  the  dorsum  of  the 
foot.  Kneading  is  done  by  placing  both  thumbs  on 
the  dorsum,  and  the  fingers  on  the  sole  of  the  foot. 
The  region  of  the  calcaneo-scaphoid  ligament  is  attended 
to  with  special  care,  this  being  the  most  tender  spot 
of  the  foot.  Should  the  arch  be  flattened,  the  foot  is 
bent  repeatedly  into  the  proper  shape. 

Pain  is  the  first  symptom  to  abate  during  such  treat- 
ment; after  this  follows  the  deformity.  If  the  case 
requires  an  application  of  plaster-of-Paris  for  the  sake 
of  correcting  the  deformity,  movements  and  massage 
are  employed  as  soon  as  the  plaster  is  removed.  The 
plaster  must  not  be  left  on  too  long,  a  fortnight  being  the 
maximum,  on  account  of  muscular  atrophy  which  fre- 
quently occurs.  Rest  in  bed  is  sometimes  necessary  in 
cases  where  pain  is  unbearable,  or  where  there  is  a 
great  deal  of  muscular  spasm  in  the  peronei. 

Congenital  flat  foot,  just  as  other  congenital  defor- 
mities, such  as  club-foot  or  talipes  equino-varus,  always 
requires  individual  consideration,  so  that  the  treatment 
will  be  a  different  one  in  every  case.  It  is,  however,  impor- 
tant to  remember  that  during  the  first  month  of  life,  as 
well  as  after  tenotomies,  or  plaster-of-Paris  redressments, 
massage  and  movements  alone,  or  combined  with  light 
splints  or  orthopaedic  boots,  are  of  an  enormous  value. 

The  same  is  to  be  said  about  paralytic  deformities 
such  as  those  resulting  from  infantile  paralysis  and 
others  (see  nervous  disorders).  It  is  to  be  borne  in 
mind  that  only  exercises  can  really  strengthen  a  muscle 
• — rest  can  only  weaken  it ;  this  is  a  physiological  fact 
which  nothing  can  alter. 


DEFORMITIES  73 

Massage  should  always  be  adopted  as  early  as  it  can  be, 
because  it  has  been  noticed  that  the  paralysis  goes  back  and 
muscles  recover  to  a  greater  extent  if  properly  attended 
to  without  delay  than  if  left  alone  until  contractures 
begin  to  appear.  Paralytic  conditions,  due  to  injuries 
or  tight  splints,  are  on  the  whole  treated  similarly. 

In  old-standing  cases,  or  in  cases  where  one  group  of 
muscles  is  entirely  paralysed,  splints  are  of  great  service. 
They  help  to  overcome  the  action  of  those  muscles 
which  were  left  intact,  thus  preventing  contractures. 
How  far  even  very  inveterate  cases  are  capable  of 
improvement  may  be  seen,  from  the  two  pictures 
illustrating  the  case  of  Volkmann's  ischsemic  contracture 
of  the  hand,  referred  to  above  (Figs.  5  and  6). 

Traumatic  congenital  torticollis,  due  to  rupture  of 
the  sterno-mastoid  during  delivery  of  the  head,  seen 
soon  after  birth,  can  be  greatly  improved  if  attacked 
at  once  by  manipulations.  To  hasten  the  absorption 
of  blood,  massage  in  the  shape  of  very  gentle  kneading 
is  applied  to  the  torn  muscle,  by  pinching  it  between 
the  thumbs  and  the  first  and  second  fingers.  Later 
on  energetic  passive  movements  of  the  head,  which 
put  the  damaged  muscle  on  stretch,  tend  to  prevent 
cicatricial  shortening.  To  that  end  the  infant's  head  is 
grasped  by  the  surgeon  with  one  hand,  the  other  being 
placed  on  the  shoulder  of  the  affected  side,  so  as  to 
steady  the  child's  trunk.  The  head  is  first  rotated  in 
the  opposite  direction,  and  then  extended  in  order  to 
overcome  the  action  of  the  contracted  sterno-mastoid, 
which  is  a  double  one  :  flexion  and  rotation.  Too 
much  force  must  not  be  employed,  because  of  the  risk 


74  DEFORMITIES 

of  a  fresh  rupture.  The  treatment  should  be  continued 
for  several  months  to  prevent  relapses. 

Also  in  adults  mechano-therapeutic  treatment  is  most 
advisable  after  an  operative  division  of  the  tendon. 
Movements  of  all  kinds  should  be  employed  with  great 
perseverance,  here  again  with  the  object  of  preventing 
recurrence.  An  elastic  bandage  may  be  worn  for 
some  time  to  keep  the  head  permanently  in  a  correct 
position — also  a  poroplastic  collar  may  be  tried,  but 
should  not  be  relied  upon  as  the  only  measure. 

SprengeVs  shoulder,  if  noticed  shortly  after  birth,  can 
be  considerably  improved  by  gymnastic  exercises, 
tending  to  increase  the  expansion  of  the  chest.  Swim- 
ming movements,  breathing  exercises,  bracing  the 
shoulders,  in  fact,  every  kind  of  movement  mobilising 
the  scapulae,  bringing  them  down  and  forcing  them  back- 
wards, are  of  use.  Should,  however,  a  bony  bridge  be 
present  between  the  upper  angle  of  the  shoulder-blade 
and  one  of  the  vertebrae — which  is  frequently  the  case — 
this  must  be  severed  by  operative  measures,  and  the 
exercises  just  described  started  without  delay,  and 
carried  out  for  months.  The  older  the  deformity,  the 
greater  the  difficulty  of  correcting  it,  and  the  more 
energy  and  perseverance  has  to  be  put  into  the  treat- 
ment in  order  to  obtain  satisfactory  results. 


II.   MEDICAL 

THE  application  of  massage  in  internal  disorders  requires 
so  much  care  and  consideration — more  even  than  is 
necessary  in  most  of  the  surgical  complaints  mentioned 
above — that  the  author  cannot  help  realising  the  great 
responsibility  resting  with  all  those  persons  who  are 
left  in  charge  of  the  administration  of  this  therapeutic 
agent. 

Whereas  the  group  of  disorders  referred  to  in  the 
first  part  of  this  book  consisted  mainly  of  troubles 
affecting  easily  accessible  and  less  vital  parts,  such  as 
limbs  and  other  peripheral  structures,  all  internal 
diseases  have  a  distinct  bearing  on  the  whole  organism, 
most  of  the  parts  thus  affected  being  of  first  importance. 

In  the  majority  of  cases  now  to  be  considered,  the 
diseased  organs  can  only  be  indirectly  influenced  by 
means  of  cautious  manipulations,  the  effect  of  which 
can  only  be  defined  by  careful  clinical  observation. 
It  is  clear  therefore  that  no  one  who  does  not  possess 
some  knowledge  of  both,  manipulations  and  observa- 
tion, should  treat  such  cases. 

Being  fully  aware  of  his  own  responsibility  in  re- 
commending mechano-therapeutic  treatment  to  others, 
the  author  has  a  strong  desire  to  collect  only  reliable 

75 


76  MEDICAL 

material,  as  far  as  this  is  possible,  and  to  avoid  the 
quotations  of  some  too  enthusiastic  writers. 

Those  who  have  grasped  the  true  meaning  of  mechano- 
therapeutics — which,  in  fact,  is  suggested  by  the  name 
itself — will  understand  that  only  such  diseases  can  be 
directly  and  successfully  influenced  by  massage  and 
movements,  whose  origin  is  due  to  some  derangement 
of  the  mechanical  forces  governing  healthy  organisms. 
Hence  it  is  not  very  likely  that  massage  would  have 
any  direct  effect  on  such  troubles  as  fevers  or  parasites. 
Nevertheless,  by  improving  the  circulation,  they  may 
help  to  eliminate  toxic  material  and  waste  products, 
and  benefit  the  patient  in  this  roundabout  way. 

Constitutional  disorders,  due  to  a  slow  or  defective 
metabolism,  can  also  be  influenced  by  our  means,  as 
far  as  an  increased  amount  of  physical  work  is  capable 
of  hastening  and  increasing  the  exchange  of  matter. 

The  dangers  of  rubbing  a  malignant  tumour,  or  an 
abdominal  abscess,  and  causing  metastasis  all  over  the 
body,  are  too  obvious  to  require  any  further  explanation. 
It  is,  however,  another  question  altogether  if  a  patient 
suffering  from  cancer  wishes  to  be  kept  alive  as  long 
as  it  is  only  possible,  and  massage  is  applied  to  his 
limbs  in  order  to  preserve  their  strength  ;  but  then 
of  course,  the  aim  is  here  totally  different. 

We  pass  now  to  the  discussion  of  individual  systems. 


A.    CIRCULATORY   SYSTEM 

The  main  object  of  physical  treatment  in  cardiac 
diseases  is  to  support  the  function  of  the  heart,  as  that 


CIRCULATORY  SYSTEM  77 

of  a  pump.  The  more  of  its  work  we  can  take  over,  the 
better.  The  heart  is  an  organ  that  cannot  be  put  to 
rest  for  so  and  so  many  hours  a  day,  and  then  made 
to  perform  some  exercises  at  will ;  yet  it  requires  rest 
when  overworked,  just  as  much  as  any  other  muscle 
does,  and  it  also  must  be  helped  to  get  stronger  when 
weakened  through  disease.  Physiology,  however, 
teaches  us  that  the  only  means  of  strengthening  a  muscle 
is  exercises.  Hence  it  is  perfectly  clear  that  in  order 
to  satisfy  all  these  points  we  have  to  pump  for  the 
heart  on  the  one  hand,  and  on  the  other  hand  to  train 
the  cardiac  muscle. 

We  can  put  this  theory  into  simple  words,  and 
explain  it  in  the  following  way. 

Supposing  we  had  before  us  a  system  of  pipes  filled 
with  water  and  corresponding  to  the  circulatory  system 
of  the  human  body  ;  and  in  the  centre  of  this  system 
one  big  pump  to  keep  the  water  going  round  and  round, 
in  order  to  supply  different  parts.  Supposing  this  pump 
was  breaking  down,  and  required  a  thorough  repair, 
but  at  the  same  time  it  was  not  possible  to  remove  it 
to  the  workshop.  The  best  way  of  maintaining  the 
water  supply  under  such  circumstances  would  be  to  put 
up  a  few  smaller  pumps  in  different  places  ;  since  it 
does  not  much  matter  whether  the  pumping  is  done 
in  the  centre,  or  at  the  periphery  of  the  system,  as  long 
as  the  amount  of  work  carried  out  is  the  same.  This, 
however,  is  precisely  the  thing  we  intend  doing  in  a 
cardiac  breakdown,  because,  after  all,  our  circulation 
is  nothing  else  but  a  process  of  pumping  blood  from 
one  place  to  another,  and  if  our  pump  goes  wrong 


78  CIRCULATORY  SYSTEM 

everything  goes  wrong,  the  health  of  distant  parts 
suffering  most. 

With  regard  to  the  effect  on  the  circulation,  it  is  of 
no  importance  whatsoever  whether  the  breakdown  of 
the  heart  is  due  to  weakness  of  the  cardiac  muscle  or 
to  vegetations  on  a  semi-lunar  or  a  bicuspid.  Just  so 
little  it  matters  to  the  water  supply  whether  the 
stagnation  is  caused  by  a  defect  in  the  cylinder  or  a 
valve. 

As  far  as  the  treatment  is  concerned,  it  is  not  of 
much  importance  whether  the  case  before  us  is  one  of 
myocarditis  or  endocarditis.  The  more  exact  diagnosis 
may,  however,  be  of  value  when  the  prognosis  is  being 
considered. 

The  moment  we  notice  signs  of  incompensation  we 
have  to  step  in,  and  do  part  of  the  heart's  work,  just 
that  part  which  appears  to  have  become  too  much  for 
its  strength. 

Let  us  now  consider  what  results  are  actually  achieved 
in  these  cases  by  drugs,  and  let  us  take  digitalis  as  a 
cardiac  remedy  par  excellence.  We  know  that  its  chief 
effect  is  that  of  a  stimulant  to  the  cardiac  action  by 
making  the  systole  more  complete,  and  by  lengthening 
the  diastole.  As  one  part  of  the  diastole  of  the  ventricles 
is  the  only  time  during  which  the  heart  is  really  resting, 
any  prolongation  of  that  period  must  benefit  the  heart 
itself,  and  on  the  other  hand  any  increase  of  its  energy 
during  its  contraction  must  benefit  the  circulation.  All 
this  seems  very  logical  until  one  realises  the  fact  that 
sooner  or  later  the  effect  of  both  these  actions  is  bound 
to  become  nil :  whatever  strength  is  gained  by  the 


CIRCULATORY  SYSTEM  79 

heart  through  the  prolongation  of  its  rest  time,  is  spent 
on  the  increased  force  of  its  systole. 

The  medicinal  therapy  has  another  drawback  besides 
the  one  just  mentioned,  and  it  does  not  much  matter 
which  drug  is  administered.  Cardiac  stimulants  merely 
exhaust  the  organ,  which,  being  spurred  on,  does  its  level 
best,  only  in  order  to  collapse  after  a  short  while,  as 
there  is  no  such  stimulus  which  would  not  be  followed 
by  reaction.  If  we  want  to  tide  the  patient  over  a 
short  critical  period,  reckoning  on  a  natural  solution 
of  the  situation  later  on,  we  need  not  take  this  point 
too  seriously  into  consideration.  Things  are,  however, 
different  when  we  know  by  experience  that  the  period 
of  defective  compensation  is  going  to  last  for  weeks,  if 
not  for  months  ;  to  administer  stimulants  then,  and 
thus  to  exhaust  the  neuro-muscular  apparatus  of  the 
heart  in  a  short  time,  is,  to  say  the  least,  unwise.  It 
would  be  just  as  unreasonable  to  correct  the  action  of 
a  bad  pump  whose  valves  are  broken  or  whose  piston  is 
crooked,  by  putting  on  more  steam. 

It  is  a  well-known  fact  that  muscular  action  promotes 
arterial  circulation  in  that  part  of  the  body  which  is 
being  moved.  This  can  already  be  deduced  from  the 
appearance  of  the  skin  alone.  The  contraction  of  a 
muscle  acts  like  a  pump,  or,  still  better,  like  a  great 
number  of  small  pumps,  because  each  fibre  in  its  way 
exercises  pressure  or  suction  on  the  neighbouring  blood- 
vessels. There  are  other  signs  of  an  increased  circulation 
besides,  such  as,  for  example,  warmth — partly  also  due 
to  other  processes — and  the  increase  of  volume  of  the 
parts  observed,  which  swell  and  become  softer  and  more 


80  CIRCULATORY  SYSTEM 

elastic,  on  account  of  a  greater  amount  of  fluid  in  the 
blood-vessels.  This  latter  condition  is  so  different  from 
an  oedema,  where  the  fluid  has  left  the  vessels,  and 
has  accumulated  in  the  tissues  around,  that  they  can 
readily  be  distinguished  from  one  another  by  touch. 

It  is  commonly  observed  that  a  quick  stroking  move- 
ment carried  out  with  a  finger  along  a  cutaneous  vein — 
especially  in  a  centripetal  direction — flattens  the  vein 
for  a  period  lasting  considerably  longer  than  the  move- 
ment itself.  This  shows  that  stroking  of  the  skin  presses 
the  blood  out  of  the  cutaneous  veins,  thus  producing 
negative  pressure  in  the  blood-vessels,  and  that  such 
manipulations  suck  the  blood  from  the  periphery  to  the 
centre. 

In  these  two  agents — muscular  action  and  centripetal 
stroking  of  the  body  surface — we  have  examples  of 
mechano-therapeutic  factors  which,  by  means  of 
peripheral  pressure  and  suction  alone,  help  to  restore 
normal  conditions  in  a  perturbed  circulatory  system. 

Besides  these,  however,  there  are  other  equally  im- 
portant and  helpful  factors.  The  enormous  influence 
of  the  respiration  on  circulation  can  be  utilised  to  the 
same  end.  There  are  particular  movements  of  certain 
joints  which  undoubtedly  help  pumping  blood  to  and 
from  the  limbs.  Also  kneading  of  the  extremities  assists 
in  the  absorption  of  oedemata  by  pushing  the  transu- 
dates  out  of  the  lymph-spaces  into  the  lymph-vessels, 
thus  driving  the  fluid  back  into  the  system. 

Finally,  there  is  at  our  disposal  the  use  of  that  large 
reservoir  represented  by  the  abdominal  Hood-vessels, 
which  we  can  fill  with  the  overflowing  fluid,  and  so 


CIRCULATORY  SYSTEM  81 

relieve  the  circulation.  To  give  an  idea  of  the  capacity 
of  these  vessels  it  might  be  mentioned  that  cases  of 
sudden  death  have  been  reported  in  which  the  unex- 
pected end  was  found  to  be  due  to  cerebral  anaemia, 
caused  by  a  too  rapid  tapping  of  ascites,  and  the  conse- 
quent sudden  dilatation  of  the  abdominal  blood-vessels. 
Artificially,  we  can,  to  a  certain  extent,  produce  a 
similar  effect  by  irritating  the  splanchnic  nerves  through 
manipulations,  such  as  abdominal  massage  in  the  shape  of 
very  deep  kneading.  The  obvious  signs  thus  produced 
are  :  an  increased  temperature  of  the  abdomen,  a  more 
or  less  marked  drowsiness  of  the  patient — due  to  a 
slight  anaemia  of  the  brain — and  a  slower  pulse  as  the 
result  of  reflex  stimulation  of  the  vagus. 

The  effect  of  deep  inspiration  on  the  circulation  has 
been  so  thoroughly  investigated  by  physiologists  that 
it  is  unnecessary  to  describe  it  here  at  any  length.  It 
suggests,  however,  one  more  way  of  relieving  the  over- 
burdened heart  by  deep  inspiratory  movements  of  the 
thorax,  which  create  a  considerable  negative  pressure 
in  the  big  trunks  of  the  venous  system,  and  thus  suck 
the  blood  from  the  periphery  with  an  enormous  force. 
In  order  to  achieve  a  still  greater  pumping  effect, 
breathing  movements  may  be  considerably  deepened 
with  the  aid  of  the  physician,  the  patient  himself  making 
no  efforts  in  this  direction  at  all. 

The  anatomy  and  the  mechanism  of  certain  joints 
show  us  another  way  of  assisting  the  flow  of  blood 
by  means  of  passive  movements.  The  blood-supply  of 
joints  is,  in  general,  very  abundant,  but  some  joints 
possess  particularly  extensive  anastomosis,  such  as,  for 
6 


82  CIRCULATORY  SYSTEM 

example,  the  hip  joint ;  the  number  of  veins  round  the 
ankle  joint  is  very  great  too,  and  quick  rotatory  move- 
ments carried  out  at  these  joints  by  twisting,  stretching, 
and  compressing  the  blood-vessels  pump  the  blood  very 
effectively.  Flexion  and  extension  of  the  thigh  have  a 
similar  effect  by  compressing  the  femoral  artery  and 
vein  against  Poupart's  ligament.  This  latter  action  has 
been  compared  to  some  one  treading  rhythmically 
on  a  garden  hose,  and  making  the  water  squirt  out  with 
a  still  greater  force. 

Based  on  the  foregoing  considerations  we  can  easily 
outline  the  plan  of  treatment  in  cardiac  diseases,  though 
the  kind  and  the  amount  of  manipulations  adopted  in 
every  case  must  necessarily  depend  on  the  condition 
of  the  heart.  In  bad  cases  great  caution  should  be 
exercised,  and  very  slow  progress  only  can  be  ex- 
pected. 


FIG.  27. — WRIST  ROLLING. 

If  the  patient  is  very  feeble,  we  begin  with  stroking 
and  kneading  of  his  extremities  alone.  The  calves  and 
the  thighs,  as  well  as  the  forearms  and  the  upper  arms, 
are  methodically  massaged  in  order  to  reduce  the 


CIRCULATORY  SYSTEM  83 

oedema,  and  to  relieve  the  discomfort  produced  by 
it.  Passive  exercises,  such  as  foot  rolling  and  wrist 
rolling  (Fig.  27),  plus  flexion  and  extension  in  these 
joints,  are  gradually  added. 

It  is  absolutely  necessary  to  watch  the  pulse,  by  taking 
it  before,  during,  and  after  the  daily  treatment. 

Gradually,  hip  rolling  is  introduced,  though  this  may 
be  started  with  right  away,  if  the  condition  of  the 
patient  allows  it,  and  if  these  movements  will  not  have 
any  deteriorating  effect  on  the  pulse.  Hip  rolling  is 
given  quite  passively,  and  is  done  by  the  physician, 
who  with  one  hand  grasps  the  patient's  foot,  placing 
his  palm  under  the  sole,  and  the  thumb  on  the  dorsum, 
and  with  the  other  hand  gets  hold  of  the  leg  just  above 
the  knee,  which  is  kept  bent.  Circumduction  is  carried 
out  in  the  hip  joint  without  any  assistance  of  the 
patient,  who  must  learn  to  relax  all  his  muscles,  so  as 
not  to  exercise  any  resistance  whatever. 

Arm  rolling  is  a  much  stronger  movement,  which  is 
given  in  a  sitting  posture,  and  therefore  only  applied 
to  lighter  or  more  improved  cases. 

Abdominal  massage — which  will  be  described  in  more 
detail  in  the  chapter  on  the  digestive  system — ought 
to  be  employed  in  every  heart  case.  Besides  the  influ- 
ence on  the  circulation  it  has  a  definite  effect  on  the 
digestion,  which  is  often  out  of  order  in  these  cases. 

Trunk  exercises  are  of  a  great  variety,  and  should  be 
practised  according  to  the  strength  of  the  patient.  We 
begin  with  the  lightest  one. 

"  Trunk  lifting  "  or  "  trunk  raising  "  is  carried  out 
without  in  the  least  disturbing  the  patient.  The 


84  CIRCULATORY  SYSTEM 

physician  stands  at  the  head  of  the  bed  and  takes  hold 
of  the  patient's  shoulders  by  placing  his  palms  over 
the  shoulders  and  under  the  armpits,  the  thumbs  on 
the  acromion.  The  patient  is  told  to  breathe  deeply, 
and  with  every  inspiration  the  physician  pulls  the 
shoulders  upwards  as  far  as  it  is  possible,  and  then  lets 
them  return  to  their  original  position.  After  a  short 
pause,  lasting  until  the  next  inspiration,  the  movement 
is  repeated.  Should  any  unpleasant  symptoms,  such 
as  giddiness  or  palpitation,  occur  during  exercises,  these 
have  to  be  either  interrupted,  or  carried  out  with  less 
force.  Gradually,  other  breathing  movements,  like  those 
described  in  connection  with  scoliosis,  may  be  added, 
and  are,  as  a  rule,  found  here  very  useful. 

As  soon  as  the  patient  is  able  to  sit  up,  "  trunk 
rolling  "  is  indicated,  and  the  patient  is  now,  to  a 
certain  extent,  expected  to  assist  the  doctor.  The 
patient  sits  on  a  stool,  his  hands  resting  on  his  hips, 
and  the  physician,  placing  his  hands  on  the  patient's 
shoulders,  makes  him  perform  rotatory  movements  in- 
volving the  upper  part  of  his  body.  The  pulse  must  be 
taken  every  few  minutes,  and,  should  tachycardia  be 
observed,  the  patient  must  immediately  lie  down  to 
rest.  Trunk  lifting  can  also  be  done  in  sitting. 

The  effect  of  all  these  manipulations  is  precisely  the 
same  as  that  of  digitalis  :  the  pulse  becomes  fuller  and 
more  regular,  its  rate  approaching  the  normal ;  the 
effect,  however,  is  here  a  more  lasting  one.  This  is 
explained  by  the  fact  that  the  heart's  work  has  been 
actually  diminished,  instead  of  being  increased — as  is 
the  case  with  most  cardiac  stimuli.  Such  treatment 


CIRCULATORY  SYSTEM  85 

gives  the  pumping  organ  a  good  chance  to  recover, 
and,  by  lowering  the  blood  pressure,  makes  cardiac 
failure  from  overwork  practically  impossible,  provided 
that  no  new  aggravating  factors  supervene. 

Mechano-therapy  possesses  another,  more  direct, 
method  of  influencing  the  cardiac  action,  by  either 
increasing  or  decreasing  the  pulse  rate  and  the  blood 
pressure.  This  is  effected  by  a  direct  application  of 
certain  manipulations  to  the  cardiac  region.  The 
experiments  of  Levin  of  Stockholm,  who  took  about 
8,000  pulse  measurements,  showed  that  stroking  and 
gentle  vibration  of  the  cardiac  region  reduce  the  blood 
pressure  and  the  pulse  rate  (by  10-20  heart-beats). 
Hacking,  and  a  more  vigorous  percussion  of  the  thorax 
over  the  heart,  produce  raising  of  the  blood  pressure 
and  an  increased  pulse  rate  (8-10).  As  this,  however, 
is  not  always  equally  well  borne  by  all  patients,  it 
should  not  be  indiscriminately  insisted  upon. 

Abdominal  massage  also  reduces  the  pulse  rate  con- 
siderably ;  this  is  most  likely  due  to  a  stimulation  of 
the  vagus,  which  has  a  depressory  influence  on  the  heart. 
(The  author  succeeded  in  lowering  the  blood  pressure 
in  one  sitting  by  10  Hg.,  this  having  been  the  effect 
of  very  gentle  vibrations  applied  to  the  cardiac  region, 
and  carried  out  with  the  hand  alone.) 

All  the  manipulations  described  above  are  applicable 
to  cases  with  a  more  or  less  marked  loss  of  compensation^ 
since  they  are  all  meant  to  reduce  the  heart's  work. 
Should  this  help  on  to  a  complete  return  of  compen- 
sation, measures  must  be  taken  in  order  to  strengthen 
the  cardiac  muscle  so  as  to  make  it  capable  of  performing 


86  CIRCULATORY  SYSTEM 

the  usual  amount  of  work  expected  from  a  normal 
organ,  and  not  merely  of  maintaining  the  circulation 
under  such  favourable  conditions  as  rest  in  bed  and 
daily  massage.  This  can  only  be  achieved  by  active 
exercises. 

Gradual  increase  of  work  strengthens  the  heart  muscle 
as  it  strengthens  other  muscles.  This,  however,  is  only 
possible  after  a  prolonged  period  of  cardiac  rest  in  the 
beginning  of  the  treatment  just  described.  The  plus 
work  consisting  of  exercises  is,  of  course,  not  carried 
out  all  day  long,  but  during  a  very  small  part  of  it  only. 

The  active  exercises  here  adopted  are  even  more 
numerous  than  the  passive  ones.  Besides  those  already 
mentioned,  which  can  also  be  done  voluntarily,  there 
are  many  others,  comprising,  in  fact,  every  possible 
movement  of  the  body.  All  of  them  can  also  be  per- 
formed against  resistance.  This  circumstance  gives 
us  means  of  regulating  their  force  at  will,  and  thus 
enables  us  to  have  a  direct  control  over  the  heart's 
work. 

Movements  involving  the  extremities  are  less  fatiguing 
for  the  patient  than  those  of  the  trunk,  on  account  of 
their  smaller  weight.  Thus,  requiring  less  muscular 
action,  the  legs  and  the  arms  should  first  be  commenced 
with  ;  flexion  and  extension,  abduction,  adduction  and 
rotation  of  the  feet  and  wrists,  as  well  as  movements 
of  the  elbow  and  the  knee,  shoulder  and  hip  joints,  are 
employed  either  in  lying,  sitting,  or  standing.  The  pulse 
is,  of  course,  taken  frequently  to  prevent  unpleasant 
complications. 

Though  practised  by  the  Swedish  gymnasts  long  before 


CIRCULATORY  SYSTEM  87 

Schott,  most  of  the  resisted  exercises  were  included  in 
what  is  nowadays  termed  the  "  Nauheim  treatment." 
They  are  of  beneficial  influence  in  cases  of  dilatation  of 
the  heart,  tending  to  diminish  the  area  of  cardiac  dulness, 
as  proved  by  percussion.  Also  irregularities  of  all  kinds, 
especially  those  following  infectious  diseases,  are  often 
completely  cured.  Patients  suffering  from  a  simple 
nervous  palpitation,  or  from  some  other  kind  of  an 
abnormally  agitated  cardiac  action,  always  express 
their  satisfaction  at  the  soothing  effect  of  massage  and 
movements,  and  find  that  each  sitting  steadies  their 
heart,  and  relieves  the  oppression  in  the  chest.  Cases 
of  valvular  disease  are  helped  to  maintain  a  satisfactory 
compensation,  or  to  regain  it  if  the  latter  has  been  lost. 

Little  definite  can  be  said  of  the  duration  of  the 
treatment,  as  it  always  depends  on  the  individual  case. 
However,  a  lasting  effect  can  be  obtained  already  after 
a  course  of  six  weeks,  shorter  treatment  being  of  use 
only  in  very  mild  cases.  Another  course  of  six  weeks 
is  sometimes  required  after  an  interval  of  a  few  months, 
and  there  is,  of  course,  no  objection  to  a  prudent  adminis- 
tration of  drugs  in  conjunction  with  physical  therapy. 


B.   RESPIRATORY  SYSTEM 

At  first  sight  it  may  perhaps  seem  strange  that 
mechano-therapeutics  could  have  any  bearing  whatever 
on  this  group  of  maladies.  Experience,  however, 
furnishes  us  with  ample  evidence  that  the  application 
of  mechanical  treatment  in  selected  ca,ses  is  undoubtedly 


88  RESPIRATORY  SYSTEM 

of  great  value.  Thus,  we  have  in  Sylvester's  method  of 
resuscitation  of  the  drowned  the  best  proof  of  the  efficacy 
of  mechanic  measures  as  applied  to  cases  of  asphyxia. 
The  value  of  artificial  respiration  will  hardly  be  ques- 
tioned by  anybody  who  has  had  to  adopt  it  in  critical 
moments. 

Massage  plays  an  important  role  as  a  preventive 
measure  against  hypostatic  pneumonia  in  old  or  very 
debilitated  persons,  who  have  to  be  confined  to  their 
beds  for  a  long  period.  The  only  cause  of  this  trouble 
is — as  suggested  by  the  name  itself — a  defective  circu- 
lation, such  as  a  stasis  in  the  big  pulmonary  blood- 
vessels. 

In  the  foregoing  chapter  means  were  described  with 
the  aid  of  which  bad  circulation  could  be  improved  in 
cardiac  diseases.  Hypostasis  of  the  lungs,  being  only 
a  symptom  of  deficient  cardiac  activity,  and  not  a 
disease  in  itself,  must  be  treated  on  the  same  lines  as 
all  the  other  circulatory  troubles.  To  avoid  unneces- 
sary repetition,  readers  are  referred  to  the  chapter  on 
circulatory  system. 

An  addition  now  worth  making  is  the  clapping  of 
the  thorax  with  both  hands  as  well  as  shaking  :  two 
movements  which  hold  good  in  all  pulmonary  troubles 
treated  by  massage.  They  are  done  by  placing  both 
hands  flat  on  the  patient's  chest,  and  clapping  it  sys- 
tematically all  over,  whilst  the  patient  is  either  sitting 
or  standing.  The  physician  then,  without  changing 
his  position,  turns  his  hands  over,  and  does  the  same 
manipulation  on  the  patient's  back,  moving  up  and  down, 
and  to  the  sides.  The  clapping  has  to  be  carried  put 


RESPIRATORY  SYSTEM  89 

extremely  gently,  and  must  not  cause  any  pain  or  dis- 
comfort whatever. 

The  shaking,  one  of  the  most  difficult  movements  that 
exists,  is  carried  out  in  the  recumbent  posture  as  follows. 
One  slips  both  one's  hands  high  up  under  the  patient's 
shoulders,   palms    upwards    (the   patient  lying  on  his 
back),  then,  lifting  the  patient's  trunk  slightly  off  the 
bed,  his  thorax  is  shaken  by  gentle  vibratory  move- 
ments, whilst  the  hands  are  sliding  in  a  downward  and 
outward  direction  towards  the  hypochondriac  region. 
This  being  reached,  the  movement  is  finished  off  by 
a  gentle  compression  of  the  thorax.     Both  these  move- 
ments, shaking   as  well   as  clapping,  require  practice 
combined  with  some  skill  on  the  part  of  the  adminis- 
trator, and  an  absolute  passivity  and  deep  respiration 
on  the  part  of  the  patient.     Clapping  is  done  with  both 
hands   alternately  during  the  patient's  expiration,  as 
well  as  during  the  inspiration,  whereas  in  shaking  both 
hands  are  employed  simultaneously,  and  only  during 
the  expiration. 

Clapping  and  shaking  are  successfully  applied  in  those 
pulmonary  complaints  where  there  is  a  great  difficulty 
of  expectoration,  in  chronic  bronchitis  for  example.  This 
is  pre-eminently  benefited  by  such  manipulations,  as 
they  loosen  the  tough  secretion,  and  help  to  detach  it 
from  the  mucous  membrane  of  the  bronchi.  How  far 
this  is  possible,  anybody  can  test  for  himself,  though 
not  suffering  from  any  definite  respiratory  trouble  : 
after  two  or  three  such  movements  he  will  probably  find 
it  necessary  to  clear  his  throat,  if  not  actually  to  cough 
up  some  phlegm,  the  source  of  which  is  not  apparent, 


90  RESPIRATORY  SYSTEM 

In  fact,  every  chronic  condition  of  the  respiratory 
tract  associated  with  an  abundant  and  thick  secretion, 
such  as  asthma,  emphysema,  bronchiectasis  or  fibrinous 
bronchitis,  is  likely  to  derive  benefit  from  mechanical 
treatment. 

That  these  methods  are  particularly  called  for  in 
cases  where  the  pulmonary  trouble  has  been  caused 
by  a  primary  heart  disease,  need  not  be  especially 
emphasised.  In  cases  of  a  compressed  or  collapsed 
lung  with  old-standing  pleuritic  adhesions  the  exercises 
are  directed  towards  increasing  the  vital  capacity,  chest 
lifting  and  trunk  rolling  being  here  particularly  suitable. 

Acute  and  chronic  catarrhal  laryngitis  are  to  a  great 
extent  curable  by  massage  of  the  neck  carried  out  with 
the  intention  of  reducing  the  congestion  of  the  throat. 
We  can  achieve  this  by  emptying  the  jugular  veins  on 
both  sides  of  the  neck,  as  well  as  by  influencing  the 
lymphatics.  This  is  best  done  by  deep  downward 


FIG.   28. — NECK  MASSAGE. 
First  Stage  of  Stroking. 

stroking  manipulations  carried  out  along  the  anterior 
borders  of  the  sterno-mastoids  in  the  following  manner. 
The  patient  sits  with  his  neck  exposed,  and  his  hea.d 


RESPIRATORY  SYSTEM  91 

is  supported  against  the  back  of  an  easy-chair.  The 
physician  stands  in  front  of  him,  and  places  both  ulnar 
borders  of  his  hands  behind  the  patient's  ears  (Fig.  28). 
Then,  moving  his  hands  downward,  he  presses  them 


FIG.  29. — NECK  MASSAGE. 

Second  Stage  of  Stroking. 

into  the  grooves  in  which  the  big  blood-vessels  are 
situated.  Arriving  at  the  middle  of  the  sterno-mas- 
toids,  he  quickly  turns  his  hands  round,  so  that  the 
ulnar  borders  are  replaced  by  the  thumbs,  which 
continue  the  movement  as  far  as  the  sterno-clavicular 
joint  (Fig.  29).  This  manipulation  must  be  done  firmly, 
yet  lightly  and  quickly,  and  should  be  frequently 
repeated  during  five  to  ten  minutes  daily. 

Besides  this,  vibrations  should  be  applied,  if  possible, 
to  the  larynx  by  means  of  an  electric  motor,  placing 
a  soft  flat  rubber  piece  to  both  sides  of  the  thyroid 
cartilage.  This  helps  to  detach  the  secretions  from  the 
mucous  membrane,  and  at  the  same  time  it  supplies 
the  affected  organ  with  fresh  blood.  To  do  this  kind 
of  massage  with  the  fingers  is  extremely  fatiguing, 
though  this  was  originally  practised  in  Sweden.  A 


92  RESPIRATORY  SYSTEM 

small  round  rubber  piece  of  a  harder  consistence  than 
the  first  one  is  used  to  influence  the  deep  cervical 
vessels  and  glands.  Some  go  even  so  far  as  to  massage 
the  axillary  glands,  which,  however,  is  hardly  ever 
necessary. 

That  massage  is  most  useful  in  cases  of  catarrhal 
pharyngitis  and  laryngitis  can  be  experienced  by  every 
one  who,  when  suffering  from  either  of  these  complaints, 
applies  gentle  rubbing  to  his  throat :  the  unpleasant 
feeling  in  the  pharynx  and  the  hoarseness  will  thus  be 
soon  relieved. 

It  will  be  seen  from  the  description  of  the  following 
case  of  mine  how  even  inveterate  cases  may  be  benefited 
by  massage.  A  young  singer  for  several  years  suffered 
from  catarrhal  laryngitis,  and  though  her  voice  was 
otherwise  considered  very  good  she  had  to  clear  her 
voice  every  few  minutes,  especially  whilst  singing.  In 
talking,  her  voice  often  broke  down,  and  she  had  to 
make  great  efforts  in  order  to  get  rid  of  the  temporary 
hoarseness.  During  two  months  she  received  daily 
treatment  on  the  lines  described  above,  practising  being 
quite  forbidden  for  that  period,  and  she  improved  so 
far  that  at  the  end  of  the  term,  in  spite  of  her  missing 
several  months,  she  obtained  a  medal  at  the  Academy. 


C.    DIGESTIVE   SYSTEM 

The  main  views  expressed  in  the  other  chapters  hold 
good  here,  and  we  find  that  those  digestive  troubles 
which  are  due  to  mechanical  causes  are  benefited  by 


DIGESTIVE   SYSTEM  93 

mechano- therapeutic  measures.  Great  improvement 
may  be  expected  from  massage  where  the  motility 
of  the  intestinal  apparatus  is  impaired,  and  where 
the  primary  cause  lies  either  in  the  atony  of  the 
muscular  wall  of  the  viscera,  or  in  the  weakness  of  the 
abdominal  wall.  Of  course,  cases  in  which  the  functions 
of  the  bowels  are  in  any  way  impaired  by  an  acute 
or  a  chronic  obstruction,  being  unsuitable  for  massage, 
will,  as  a  rule,  necessitate  the  adoption  of  operative 
measures. 

In  cases  of  dilatation  of  the  stomach,  the  gastric 
contents,  failing  to  be  transmitted  through  the  pylorus 
into  the  duodenum  within  the  proper  time,  must  be 
pushed  along  by  mechanical  means  ;  otherwise  stasis, 
fermentation,  and  great  discomfort  will  arise.  There 
is  no  other  way  of  emptying  the  stomach  in  the  right 
direction,  except  with  our  hands  used  as  a  substitute 
for  the  normal  action  of  the  gastric  musculature. 

Particularly  well  suited  for  our  treatment  are  vibra- 
tions when  applied  to  the  epigastric  region.  They 
may  either  be  carried  out  with  the  hands,  which  are 
placed  flat  on  the  abdomen,  the  fingers  transmitting 
the  shaking  movements  on  to  the  stomach,  or  a  motor 
may  be  used.  In  the  latter  case  a  soft  rubber  piece 
is  chosen,  though  manual  treatment  is  much  to  be 
preferred. 

The  treatment  begins  under  the  left  hypochondrium, 
where  the  cardiac  orifice  is  expected  to  lie,  and  is  con- 
tinued towards  the  pylorus.  The  hands  are  held 
slightly  inclined  towards  the  outlet,  and  they  have 
to  perform  such  movements  which  tend  to  expel  the 


94  DIGESTIVE  SYSTEM 

gastric  contents  into  the  duodenum.  These  manipula- 
tions, however,  ought  not  to  be  performed  too  soon 
after  the  patient  has  taken  his  food  :  one  or  two  hours 
after  a  light  meal  will  as  a  rule  suffice  in  order  to  prevent 
all  unpleasant  sensations. 

Dilatation  of  the  stomach  is  often  combined  with  a 
general  atony  of  the  intestines  resulting  in  constipation, 
and  therefore  general  abdominal  massage  is  always 
indicated  in  these  cases.  As,  however,  constipation  is 
a  complaint  in  which  nowadays  massage  has  become 
the  most  popular  kind  of  treatment,  advocated  by  the 
highest  medical  authorities,  special  attention  must 
now  be  given  to  this  widespread  mischief  and  to 
its  cure. 

Constipation  is  mainly  due  to  a  sluggish  peristalsis 
which  causes  an  abnormal  absorption  of  water,  and 
therefore  an  excessive  inspissation  of  faeces.  Hastening 
of  peristaltic  movements,  on  the  other  hand,  always 
provokes  soft  stools.  Most  of  the  aperients  used  have 
an  accelerating  influence  on  the  intestinal  action,  either 
through  an  irritation  of  the  mucous  membrane,  or 
through  a  stimulation  of  Auerbach's  plexus.  Other 
drugs,  such  as  opium,  for  instance,  cause  artificial  con- 
stipation by  slowing  down  the  peristalsis.  Unfortun- 
ately, the  effect  of  drugs  is  in  reverse  proportion  to 
the  length  of  time  during  which  they  are  administered. 
The  excitability  of  the  nerve  centres  as  well  as  of  the 
mucous  membrane  of  the  intestines,  becomes  lessened 
and  replaced  by  an  increasing  indifference  to  such 
stimuli.  And,  as  the  habit  of  taking  aperients  grows, 
so  the  doses  have  to  be  enlarged.  The  result  of  such 


DIGESTIVE  SYSTEM  95 

practice  is,  generally  speaking,  a  total  failure  after  a 
few  months,  or  years. 

The  proper  and  the  most  ideal  treatment  of  consti- 
pation would  be  that  which  would  strengthen  the  un- 
striped  muscles  of  the  whole  intestinal  tract ;  but  par 
excellence  it  is  the  muscular  coat  of  the  large  intestine 
that  has  to  be  strengthened.  Only  those  measures  can 
be  really  successful  which  tend  to  establish  normal 
conditions.  Habitual  taking  of  remedies,  however,  can- 
not be  called  normal.  The  only  method  approaching 
this  ideal  treatment  is  afforded  by  mechano-therapy ; 
since  in  this  case,  as  well  as  in  all  the  others,  the  object 
of  our  treatment  is  the  strengthening  of  muscular  tissues 
through  exercising  them. 

Massage  of  the  abdomen  consists  in  the  first  place  of 
bimanual  kneading  all  along  the  ascending,  transverse, 
and  descending  colon  in  a  circle,  thus  following  the 
physiological  direction  of  the  peristalsis.  The  patient 
is  lying  with  his  head  raised  and  his  knees  slightly 
flexed  in  order  to  relax  the  abdominal  muscles  as  com- 
pletely as  possible.  The  hands  are  placed  one  on  top 
of  the  other,  the  finger-tips  being  placed  directly  over 
the  large  intestine.  This  can  be  distinctly  felt  when 
containing  faecal  masses. 

Some  patients  state  that  as  soon  as  massage  of  the 
ccecum  is  begun,  they  feel  the  necessity  of  emptying  their 
bowels,  an  effect  which  is  probably  due  to  a  reflex  of  the 
ccecum  on  the  rectum.  Manual  treatment  of  this  kind  is 
much  more  efficient  than  the  rolling  of  a  cannon-ball,  as 
advocated  by  some  ;  it  goes  much  deeper,  and  it  helps 
mechanically  to  push  along  the  contents  of  the  bowel. 


96  DIGESTIVE   SYSTEM 

There  are  other  useful  manipulations  belonging  to 
abdominal  massage.  Such,  for  example,  is  .the  knead- 
ing of  the  whole  abdomen,  which  is  carried  out  much 
in  the  same  way  as  the  colon  massage,  only  including 
the  small  intestines  as  well.  Here  both  hands  of  the 
manipulator  grasp  the  whole  of  the  stomach,  the  patient 
being  placed  as  above.  The  physician  sits  on  the 
patient's  right,  and  puts  his  right  hand  flat  above  the 
right  iliac  crest,  and  the  left  hand  below  the  left  hypo- 
chondrium.  The  movements  are  carried  out  so  as  to 
bring  the  two  hands  together  in  the  middle,  whilst 
exercising  pressure  on  the  structures  below.  The  same 
is  repeated  after  the  hands  have  been  reversed. 

Massage  of  the  abdominal  muscles  is  done  in  the  same 
way  as  that  of  other  muscles,  kneading,  however,  being 
mainly  applied,  since  hacking  would  be  very  inappro- 
priate on  account  of  the  unpleasant  sensations  thus 
caused,  as  well  as  on  account  of  a  possible  shock.  Hack- 
ing would  also  be  quite  useless  without  having  any  solid 
background  for  the  parts  thus  treated.  In  kneading, 
the  abdominal  parietes  have  to  be  firmly  grasped  with 
both  hands,  at  right-angles  to  the  recti  muscles,  and 
treated  as  if  they  were  dough. 

We  arrive  here  at  a  point  where  the  condition  of  the 
abdominal  muscles  ought  to  be  considered,  since  that 
is,  in  my  opinion,  as  important  as  the  intestines  them- 
selves. Indeed,  there  is  no  other  factor  that  would 
favour  habitual  constipation  as  much  as  the  weakness 
of  the  abdominal  wall.  Not  without  significance  is  it 
that  we  find  this  complaint  so  much  more  common  in 
women,  who  wear  corsets,  and  who  do  not  over-indulge 


DIGESTIVE  SYSTEM  97 

in  exercises,  than  in  men.  Stays  and  want  of  physical 
training  produce  atrophy  of  the  trunk  muscles,  this 
necessarily  leading  to  great  difficulty  in  emptying  the 
bowels  during  defcecation,  as  well  as  difficulty  in 
emptying  the  uterus  during  parturition.  Comparison 
is  often  drawn  between  civilised  women  and  their 
primitive  sisters  who  still  use  their  own  strong  muscles 
as  a  natural  support,  instead  of  the  ridiculous  product 
of  our  fashions. 

Ploss  and  other  great  authorities  on  women's  customs 
and  habits,  as  well  as  travellers,  state  that  to  most 
native  women  a  confinement  is  just  as  easy  and  quick 
as  an  act  of  defsecation,  which  can  rarely  be  said  of  our 
patients.  These  would,  however,  be  greatly  benefited 
in  both  respects  by  appropriate  exercises,  directed  to- 
wards the  strengthening  of  the  abdominal  muscles,  and 
particularly  of  the  recti  muscles. 

Besides  massage,  patients  suffering  from  constipation 
ought  to  perform  the  following  movements  :  lying  on  a 
bed,  couch,  or  floor,  they  raise  their  trunk,  whilst  the 
hands  are  kept  by  the  sides.  The  legs  should  be  strapped 
or  held  by  the  person  administering  treatment,  this 
rendering  the  exercises  easier  for  beginners.  Another 
exercise  consists  of  "  leg  raising,"  whilst  the  trunk  is 
kept  quiet.  The  knees  can  either  be  bent  (easier)  or 
kept  straight  (more  difficult) .  These  exercises  may  be  at 
first  performed  passively,  by  the  medical  attendant,  or 
voluntarily,  by  the  patient  himself  or  herself,  or  against 
resistance,  according  to  the  strength  of  the  patient, 
and  the  progress  that  has  been  made.  Resistance  is 
effected  by  placing  one's  hands  flat  on  the  patients' 
7 


98  DIGESTIVE  SYSTEM 

back  and  chest  in  the  case  of  "trunk  raising,"  and  on 
the  knees  in  the  case  of  "  leg  raising."  Each  exercise 
should  be  performed  slowly,  and  should  be  repeated 
six  to  twelve  times.  Slight  pain  may  be  experienced 
in  the  recti  muscles  after  the  first  day  or  two,  which, 
however,  promptly  disappears.  It  will  be  surprising 
to  find  how  very  few  women  can  do  "  trunk  raising  " 
without  assistance— a  movement  which,  as  a  rule,  does 
not  present  any  difficulties  to  men. 

"  Trunk  bending  "  in  a  standing  position,  the  hands 
being  here  placed  on  the  hips,  as  well  as  "  trunk  rolling  " 
in  a  sitting  position,  are  both  most  useful  exercises  which 
can  be  practised  in  addition  to  the  first-mentioned 
ones,  combined  of  course  with  abdominal  massage. 

A  very  good,  though  rather  complicated,  movement 
is  the  following.  Ihe  patient  rests  both  hands  on  a 
mantelpiece,  or,  in  fact,  on  any  object  on  a  level  with 
his  shoulders,  the  arms  being  kept  at  full  extension 
all  the  time.  The  manipulator  places  one  of  his  own 
hands  on  the  patient's  chest,  and  the  other  on  his  back. 
The  patient  is  told  to  raise  himself  on  tip-toe,  and  to 
push  his  trunk  forward  without  bending  the  arms. 
The  second  part  of  this  exercise  consists  of  the  patient 
bending  his  knees  completely,  without  getting  down  on 
his  heels.  The  third  part  consists  of  pushing  the  trunk 
backwards  and  straightening  out  the  knees.  Finally 
the  patient  returns  to  the  original  position  by  putting 
the  heels  to  the  ground.  During  the  first  half  of  the 
exercises  the  administrator  effects  resistance,  preventing 
the  patient  from  bending  his  legs  by  a  slight  upward 
movement  of  his  (administrator's)  hands,  and  during 


DIGESTIVE  SYSTEM  99 

the  second  half  of  the  exercise  he  does  the  contrary 
by  a  downward  pressure. 

A  treatment  carried  out  on  the  principles  outlined 
above  is  the  best  that  can  be  directed  towards  a 
cure  of  the  causes  of  intestinal  stasis.  It  is  most 
beneficial  in  cases  of  toxaemia  of  alimentary  origin,  and 
is  certainly  helpful  in  such  condition  as  flatulence. 
This  applies  not  only  to  adults,  but  also  to  infants. 
Personally,  I  have  seen  very  good  results  from  vibra- 
tions and  gentle  kneading  applied  to  breast  babies. 
A  relief  of  that  common  yet  so  very  embarrassing 
complaint  (caused  in  most  cases  by  swallowed  air) 
follows  promptly  after  a  single  sitting. 

Several  authorities  who  took  part  in  the  recent  dis- 
cussion on  alimentary  toxaemia,  held  by  the  Royal 
Society  of  Medicine,  expressed  themselves  strongly  in 
favour  of  abdominal  massage  as  a  treatment  of  con- 
stipation. 


D.    CONSTITUTIONAL  DISEASES 

The  main  cause  underlying  all  constitutional  troubles 
is  defective  metabolism.  Either  it  is  a  faulty  meta- 
bolism of  fats,  or  that  of  carbohydrates,  or  proteins, 
the  result  of  it  being  either  adiposity,  diabetes,  or  gout. 
Anything  that  would  stimulate  the  sluggish  process 
of  transformation  of  these  matters  would  necessarily 
bring  benefit  to  those  who  suffer  from  the  above-men- 
tioned disorders.  We  all  know  that  there  is  no  other 
natural  way  of  raising  the  metabolism  but  muscular 


100  CONSTITUTIONAL  DISEASES 

action  ;  in  this  factor  we  have  a  kind  of  stove  in  which 
we  burn  our  materials  otherwise  wasted.  Everything 
in  the  way  of  food  taken  must  be  either  used  up  in 
the  stove,  or  stored  up  somewhere  in  the  body,  or 
else  it  is  wastefully  eliminated.  In  a  healthy  subject 
either  the  whole  amount  of  the  introduced  material  is 
burnt,  or  a  little  of  it  is  left  over,  and  deposited  as  a 
reserve  to  fall  back  on  in  case  of  need. 

Constitutional  troubles  arising  from  the  third  possi- 
bility, namely,  from  taking  too  little  nourishment,  are 
not  often  met  with,  and  can  as  a  rule  be  readily  dealt 
with.  In  fact,  diabetes,  gout,  and  adiposity  are  gener- 
ally accompanied  by  an  excessive  introduction  of  fuel 
which  cannot  possibly  be  all  burnt  in  the  normal  way. 

Restrictions  with  regard  to  food  are  thus  of  first 
importance,  and  they  cannot  be  replaced  by  any  other 
measures.  However,  in  order  to  help  the  organism  in 
dealing  with  matters  under  the  abnormal  conditions 
created  by  the  disease,  we  must  attempt  to  keep  up  a 
bigger  fire  in  the  stove,  since  this  will  enable  the  patient 
to  get  rid  of  the  abnormal  bulk  of  fuel  which  is  not  only 
useless,  but  can  become  positively  dangerous.  In  other 
words,  we  have  to  break  through  the  vicious  circle 
set  up  in  these  cases  :  want  of  muscular  action  leading 
to  an  excessive  accumulation  of  foodstuffs,  and  the 
excessive  accumulation  of  foodstuffs  leading  to  a 
decrease  of  muscular  action.  The  best  results  will 
be  achieved  by  interrupting  this  circle  at  two  places  : 
cutting  off  the  excessive  import  of  fuel  by  reducing 
the  amount  of  food,  and  increasing  the  fire  by  introducing 
exercises  and  massage. 


CONSTITUTIONAL  DISEASES  KM 

It  would  be  impossible  to  describe  special  treatment 
for  every  constitutional  disease.  All  that  can  be  said 
is  that  the  treatment  here  has  to  be  general,  as  general 
are  the  diseases.  It  has  to  include  all  parts  of  the 
body,  as  we  do  not  really  know  where  the  seat  and 
the  origin  of  the  disease  lie.  Local  applications  will 
thus  be  rarely  called  for,  if  at  all. 

General  massage  in  constitutional  disorders  consists, 
briefly,  of  the  following  manipulations:  kneading  and 
clapping  of  legs  and  arms,  as  well  as  kneading  and 
hacking  of  the  back  ;  abdominal  and  neck  massage  ; 
foot,  leg,  arm,  and  trunk  rollings  ;  breathing  exercises. 
Flexion,  extension,  circumduction,  and  adduction  plus 
abduction  in  all  the  joints  where  such  movements  are 
practicable,  should  be  carried  out  passively,  voluntarily, 
and  against  resistance,  according  to  the  patient's  state 
of  health. 

Breathing  exercises  are  especially  given  at  the  begin- 
ning and  at  the  end  of  the  daily  sittings.  Abdominal 
massage  and  trunk  raising  are  particularly  commended 
in  adiposity,  which  is  always  accompanied  by  weak 
trunk  muscles.  Such  treatment  is  here  followed  by 
a  decrease  of  fat  and  an  increase  of  muscular  tissue. 

The  main  object  of  mechano- therapeutics  is  thus  to 
increase  the  oxidation  of  the  heating  materials,  and 
the  function  of  breathing  exercises  may  thus  be  com- 
pared to  a  Bessemer  furnace  which  enables  us  to  main- 
tain a  high  temperature  which  is  necessary  for  the  burn- 
ing of  excessive  fuel.  This  certainly  applies  to  fats  and 
carbohydrates  which  are  par  excellence  coal  and  wood 
in  the  body's  household. 


102  CONSTITUTIONAL  DISEASES 

Similar  ideas  lead  us  to  the  application  of  massage 
also  in  those  constitutional  maladies  which  result  from 
insufficient  fool  absorption  and  assimilation  due  to 
an  abnormally  low  consumption.  This  is  the  vast 
number  of  cases  classed  under  the  headline  of  debility. 

We  shall  always  be  in  the  position  to  benefit  these 
cases  as  long  as  we  succeed  in  raising  the  consumption, 
and  in  maintaining  a  proper  metabolism.  We  have 
to  increase  the  body  economy  on  rational  lines,  which 
means  that  nothing  should  be  wasted  either  by  being 
thrown  away,  or  by  being  stored  up. 

By  stimulating  the  appetite  with  physical  factors 
such  as  massage  and  exercises,  we  assist  the  debilitated 
organism  in  a  better  assimilation  of  food.  This  is  the 
reason  why  mechano-therapeutics  are  so  often  advo- 
cated by  high  authorities  as  a  suitable  after-treatment 
in  cases  of  prolonged  and  wasting  diseases,  whatever 
their  nature  may  be.  The  results  achieved  by  massage 
in  these  patients  are  often  astonishing,  and  this  is  also 
perfectly  clear,  since  all  we  are  aiming  at  is  to  find 
here  a  substitute  for  the  physical  actions  of  the  body. 
This  point  ought  to  be  always  considered  as  soon  as  the 
normal  metabolism  of  an  individual  is  upset  on  the 
one  hand  by  the  disease,  and  on  the  other  by  want  of 
exercises. 

All  that  has  been  said  about  debility  applies  equally 
to  ancemia,  and  other  allied  conditions,  springing  from 
a  defective  metabolism  of  salts  (ashes),  such  as,  for 
example,  rickets. 

It  is  true  that  we  know  very  little  about  the  inner 
mechanism  of  our  body,  and  still  less  about  its  ups  and 


CONSTITUTIONAL  DISEASES  103 

downs.  This,  however,  does  not  justify  the  adminis- 
tration of  tonics  alone,  which,  after  all,  are  by  the 
majority  our  profession  believed  to  be  practically  useless, 
and  it  also  does  not  at  all  justify  the  disregard  for  other 
more  normal  measures,  here  described. 

It  may  be  added  that  in  stout  patients  mechanical 
treatment  can  be  applied  very  vigorously,  and  the  fat 
parts  subjected  to  an  energetic  kneading,  hacking,  and 
clapping ;  the  condition  of  the  heart,  however,  must  be 
carefully  watched  so  as  not  to  throw  on  this  organ 
more  work  than  it  can  comfortably  deal  with. 

E.    URINARY   SYSTEM 

Though  a  direct  influence  of  mechanic  measures  on 
the  kidneys  can  hardly  be  effected,  indirectly,  so  far 
as  the  improvement  of  the  circulation  is  concerned, 
these  agents  prove  to  be  of  great  value.  Our  interest 
must  be  in  the  first  place  directed  towards  relieving 
the  heart's  task,  which  is  markedly  increased  in  nephritic 
cases,  so  that  everything  which  had  been  said  in  the 
chapter  on  cardiac  diseases  applies  here. 

By  massage  and  movements  we  reduce  the  oedemata, 
and  help  the  heart  to  cope  with  its  work  under  such 
difficult  conditions  as  high  blood  pressure. 

Vesical  troubles,  such  as  incontinence  and  retention, 
are  more  or  less  directly  amenable  to  manipulations. 
The  treatment  consists  in  these  cases  of  massage  of 
the  bladder  through  the  abdominal  parietes,  or  through 
the  rectum,  or  both.  The  patient  assumes  a  half -lying 
and  half-squatting  position  on  the  couch,  his  knees 


104  URINARY  SYSTEM 

being  drawn  up  towards  his  chest,  and  his  head  being 
raised  as  high  as  possible.  The  index  finger  of  the 
right  hand  is  introduced  into  the  rectum,  and  the  left 
hand  influences  the  bladder  through  the  abdominal 
wall,  in  other  words,  the  massage  is  bimanual.  The 
patient  may,  as  an  alternative  position,  be  seated  in 
a  chair,  his  arms  supported  so  as  to  relax  the  belly 
muscles  completely.  Both  hands  are  pushed  into  the 
pelvis  just  above  the  fundus  of  the  bladder,  the  fingers 
being  slightly  bent,  though  kept  rigid.  Downward 
pressure  is  exercised  on  the  bladder,  which,  if  contain- 
ing too  much  urine,  has  to  be  catheterised  previous  to 
treatment.  The  patients  should  be  warned  that  the 
muscles  may  be  a  little  tender  for  the  first  few  days. 

The  object  of  this  kind  of  treatment  is  fairly  obvious. 
When  incontinence  is  caused  by  a  weakness  of  the 
sphincter,  this  muscle  will  become  strengthened  by 
mechanical  stimuli,  just  as  any  other  muscle  would. 
When,  on  the  other  hand,  retention  is  due  to  a  relaxa- 
tion of  the  detrusor  vesicse,  a  similar  effect  resulting 
in  a  better  function  of  this  muscle  may  be  expected. 
If  a  cramp  of  the  sphincter  be  the  cause  of  retention, 
urine  will  be  forced  through  by  manipulations. 

This  treatment  is  not  suitable  in  acute  inflammatory 
conditions  of  the  urinary  tract ;  chronic  catarrhal 
cases,  however,  may  be  greatly  benefited  by  massage. 

F.   NERVOUS   SYSTEM 

The  application  of  massage  in  nervous  disorders  has 
become  so  wide  of  late,  and  the  results  have  been  so 


ORGANIC  105 

encouraging,  as  compared  with  other  methods,  that  a 
more  detailed  consideration  of  mechano-therapeutics  in 
connection  with  this  class  of  maladies  will  be  required. 
For  the  sake  of  facilitating  the  survey,  the  usual 
classification  of  nervous  diseases  will  be  adhered  to. 

ORGANIC 

1.  LOCOMOTOB  ATAXIA  OB  TABES  DOBSALIS 
The  credit  of  the  introduction  of  mechano-therapeutic 
treatment  of  tabes  into  the  wider  medical  world  is  due 
to  Frenkel.  It  was  he  who  first  made  an  attempt  to 
put  these  methods  on  a  more  feasible  basis,  though 
Swedish  people  still  claim  their  priority  with  regard 
to  this  invention,  and  it  is  very  likely  that  such  treat- 
ment was  practised  in  Sweden  long  before  the  Swiss 
doctor  published  his  ideas. 

The  quintessence  of  his  scientific  elucidations  of  what 
his  methods  in  particular  are  meant  to  achieve,  and  in 
what  way  he  thinks  that  they  are  better  than  all  the 
others,  could  be  expressed  in  a  few  words.  Personally, 
I  have  not  perceived  any  substantial  difference  between 
the  various  systems,  but  I  am  rather  inclined  to  believe 
that  the  result  of  any  of  them  will  always  be  satisfactory, 
when  carried  out  intelligently,  no  matter  whether  the 
methods  be  Swiss,  Swedish,  or  English. 

The  counteracting  of  the  main  part  of  the  trouble 
will  always  be  the  chief  object  of  every  kind  of  treat- 
ment. The  main  feature  of  ataxia  being  the  loss  of  the 
sense  of  co-ordination,  anything  that  assists  in  regaining 
the  lost  muscle  sense  must  be  here  of  value. 


106  NERVOUS  SYSTEM 

A  patient  in  the  atactic  stage  of  tabes  is  like  a  little 
child  that  cannot  walk  properly.  In  both  the  equilibrium 
is  impaired  by  a  defective  sense  of  co-ordination  :  the 
first  one  knew  it,  but  lost  his  knowledge ;  the  other  has 
not  learnt  it  yet.  And  just  as  a  child  by  constant 
exercises  learns  how  to  use  his  limbs  co-ordinately, 
so  the  atactic  patient  has  to  learn  how  to  re-educate 
his  limbs  by  constant  exercises.  In  order  to  do  that, 
however,  it  is  not  absolutely  necessary  that  the  patient 
should  rigidly  adhere  to  the  exercises  described  by 
Frenkel,  and  which  are  carried  out  with  the  aid  of  his 
ingenious  appliances,  because  these  can  easily  be  replaced 
by  our  own  hands  and  fingers. 

As  the  chief  idea  of  mechano-therapeutic  treatment 
of  tabes  is  to  teach  the  patient  how  to  develop  his 
muscle  sense — in  other  words,  to  teach  him  to  walk 
as  other  people  do,  and  to  grasp  with  his  hands  objects 
of  ordinary  life  as  normal  individuals  do — these  every- 
day movements  must  be  practised  above  all.  To  make 
the  patient's  task  easier  in  the  beginning  of  the  treat- 
ment all  those  movements,  apparently  simple,  have  to 
be  divided  into  their  components,  and  such  elementary 
movements  practised  first.  Leg  exercises  can  be  prac- 
tised in  bed,  and  arm  exercises  at  a  table.  The  patient 
is  told  to  place  his  heels  or  his  toes  precisely  on  a  spot 
indicated  by  the  teacher,  whose  hands  and  fingers  are 
substitutes  for  Frenkel's  appliances.  The  movements 
thus  practised  are,  once  flexion  or  extension,  then 
abduction  and  adduction  or  rotation,  their  range 
being  gradually  increased,  and  this  is  gone  through 
every  day  to  make  sure  that  what  the  patient  has 


ORGANIC  107 

learnt  has  not  been  forgotten.  Each  limb  is  first 
practised  separately,  then  both  legs  or  arms  together 
are  made  to  perform  the  same  or  different  movements. 
Walking  is  taught  with  the  aid  of  footsteps,  drawn 
with  chalk  on  the  floor.  The  steps  should  be  small 
in  the  beginning,  the  interval  between  each  being 
gradually  increased.  The  same  applies  to  the  upper 
extremities. 

Frenkel  advises  his  patients  to  practise  piling  up 
round  pieces  of  wood  (not  unlike  draughts)  or  putting 
their  fingers  through  small  holes  on  a  kind  of  chess- 
board, or  placing  small  bits  of  wood  into  these  holes, 
the  latter  performance  being  similar  to  the  work  of  a 
telephone  exchange  official.  But,  in  fact,  many  new 
exercises  can  readily  be  invented,  and  they  will  all  be 
found  useful  if  they  only  fulfil  one  condition,  namely 
that  of  educating  the  sense  of  equilibrium. 

In  bad  cases,  that  is  in  such  cases  in  which  the  inco- 
ordination  is  far  advanced,  one  has  to  start  with  passive 
movements  which  help  to  train  the  nervous  tracts  to 
receive  the  right  reflexes,  and  to  make  the  limb  obey 
the  impulses  of  will.  As  far  as  the  accuracy  is  con- 
cerned, voluntary  movements  can  become  possible  only 
by  degrees. 

Whether  a  complete  and  radical  cure  of  ataxia  can 
be  achieved  is  rather  doubtful.  Great  improvement, 
however,  is  the  rule,  and  bedridden  patients  are  often 
enabled  to  rise,  and  to  get  about.  It  is  well  known 
that  the  presence  or  absence  of  ataxia  does  not 
yet  decide  the  fate  of  the  patient.  Other  symptoms 
may  come  more  to  the  foreground,  and  may  cast  a 


108  NERVOUS  SYSTEM 

shadow  on  the  improvement  of  inco-ordination  gained 
by  mechano- therapy. 

Bladder  symptoms  can  greatly  be  ameliorated  by 
manipulations  described  in  the  chapter  on  the  urinary 
system. 

Sensory  disturbance,  such  as  the  lightning  pains  or 
the  weakness  of  the  patient,  call  for  a  general  appli- 
cation of  massage,  consisting  of  kneading  and  hacking 
of  the  limbs  and  of  the  trunk. 

General  paralysis,  but  especially  its  form  called  tabo- 
paralysis,  should  be  treated  in  a  similar  way. 

2.  PROGRESSIVE  MUSCULAR  ATROPHY 

(Amyotrophic  lateral  sclerosis] 

Muscular  dystrophy  and  spastic  paralysis  of  infants 
(Little's  disease),  though  presenting  an  insuperable 
obstacle  to  any  other  kind  of  treatment,  are  nearly 
always  influenced  by  massage  and  exercises  which  are 
applied  to  the  parts  thus  affected. 

The  spasm  of  the  muscles  is  best  overcome  by  passive 
movements,  which  have  to  be  carried  out  energetically, 
though  painlessly.  Once  the  range  of  movements  of 
the  limbs  has  approached  the  normal,  active  movements 
will  be  found  to  be  considerably  easier. 

The  sooner  commenced,  the  better  results  can  be 
obtained  by  such  measures,  and  also,  had  an  operation 
been  performed  with  the  object  of  tendon  transplanta- 
tion to  the  spastic  muscles,  mechano-therapeutics  form, 
nevertheless,  a  very  important  adjuvant  to  the  after- 
treatment. 


ORGANIC  109 

3.  ACUTE  ANTERIOR  POLIO-MYELITIS 

(Infantile  paralysis) 

This  is  probably  the  only  spinal  disorder  in  which 
massage,  as  proved  by  the  highest  authorities,  has 
always  given  excellent  results,  not  even  to  be  compared 
with  those  of  electricity. 

The  general  scheme  of  management  of  infantile 
paralysis  ought  to  be  the  following. 

Directly  the  febrile  stage  has  passed,  and  loss  of 
power  in  the  limbs  has  been  noticed,  the  paralysed 
parts  must  be  daily  subjected  to  rubbing,  pinching, 
kneading,  and  hacking.  It  is  of  first  importance  that 
the  treatment  should  begin  as  soon  as  the  acute  stage  is 
over ;  otherwise  hopeless  deformities  will  result.  The 
intact  muscles  contract  considerably  and  stretch  the 
paralysed  ones,  thus  not  leaving  them  any  chance  of 
recovery. 

We  do  not  possess  any  better  means  of  preventing 
such  undesirable  consequences  of  paralysis  than  massage 
and  movements.  Very  often  the  overstretched  muscles 
are  not  totally  paralysed,  and  have  not  completely 
lost  their  excitability  and  contractility  at  the  time  of 
the  active  disease,  and  only  underwent  an  extensive 
atrophy  as  a  result  of  disuse.  Exercises  therefore  are 
indicated  which  stretch  the  contracted  muscles  and 
contract  the  stretched  ones.  Should  contractures  have 
developed  before  the  treatment  begins,  splints  or  other 
orthopaedic  appliances  must  be  made  use  of,  as  the 
shortened  muscles  have  a  great  power  of  resistance. 
Especially  during  night-time  light  splints  may  be  worn, 


110  NERVOUS  SYSTEM 

which  are  frequently  readjusted  as  the  improvement 
progresses.  During  the  day-time  massage  and  exercises 
have  to  be  carried  out  as  often  as  possible,  and  with 
great  perseverance.  The  treatment  should  never  be 
given  up  before  six  months  are  over,  because  some 
muscles  recover  very  late. 

When  splints  are  used,  the  limb  should  be  placed  in 
an  over-corrected  position,  so  that,  for  instance,  when 
the  flexors  of  the  wrist  are  contracted,  and  the  extensors 
paralysed  or  paretic,  the  hand  should  be  put  up  hyper- 
extended. 

Celluloid  splints  have  the  great  advantage  of  fitting 
every  shape  of  limb,  and  are  made  precisely  in  the  same 
way  as  celluloid  jackets  described  above  under  the 
treatment  of  scoliosis. 

The  splint  should  be  worn  for  a  considerable  period, 
and  if  left  off  must  be  reapplied  as  soon  as  there  are 
any  signs  of  relapse. 

The  paralysis  resulting  from  anterior  polio-myelitis 
tends  to  go  back  of  itself  to  a  certain  extent  in  the  first 
few  weeks  after  the  attack,  leaving  some  groups  of 
muscles  completely  paralysed,  others  only  paretic  ; 
some  that  were  powerless  in  the  beginning  recover  soon, 
even  without  treatment.  This  fact  might  possibly 
sustain  the  belief  that  the  whole  of  the  paralysed  area 
will  recover  in  the  course  of  time.  This,  however,  has 
not  been  proved  by  experience.  A  certain  number  of 
muscles  do  not  and  cannot  recover  without  adequate 
treatment,  for  the  reasons  stated  above,  the  main 
reason  being  the  tendency  of  the  antagonistic  muscles 
to  become  contracted. 


ORGANIC  111 

Taking  for  granted  the  fact  that  a  muscle  can  develop 
through  practice,  and  that  only  muscular  tissue  possesses 
the  quality  of  generating  new  muscular  tissue,  we  can 
expect  good  results  from  all  those  muscles  which  have 
not  completely  perished.  Where  some  few  muscular 
fibres  have  remained  untouched,  there  the  benefit  of 
massage  and  exercises  is  evident.  Electrical  treatment 
can,  of  course,  be  carried  out  simultaneously,  but,  if 
we  may  quote  an  authority  like  Osier,  it  cannot  be 
compared  in  its  results  with  the  effect  of  the  other 
treatment. 

There  are  two  kinds  of  resisted  movements  recog- 
nised in  Sweden—  co  ncentric  and  excentric.  One  of  them 
is  considered  to  be  particularly  helpful  for  restoring 
muscular  power  in  paralytic  cases  ;  both  are  executed 
by  the  patient  as  well  as  by  the  person  administering 
them.  In  concentric  exercises  the  patient  performs 
the  movement,  resistance  being  executed  by  the  gym- 
nast ;  in  the  excentric  this  process  is  reversed.  The 
difference  between  these  two  movements  is  that  in  the 
concentric  exercises  the  amount  of  the  resistance  is 
determined  by  the  gymnast,  whereas  in  the  excentric 
ones  it  is  the  patient  himself  who,  according  to  the 
strength  of  his  muscles,  offers  resistance. 

The  effect  of  each  concentric  movement  is  a  shortening 
of  the  muscles,  whilst  the  resistance  is  overcome.  The 
effect  of  the  excentric  movement  is  an  elongating  of 
the  muscles,  caused  by  their  yielding  to  the  resistance. 

It  is  held  by  many  Swedish  authorities  that  the 
excentric  movements  have  a  particularly  strong  restora- 
tive effect  on  paretic  as  well  as  contracted  muscles. 


112  NERVOUS  SYSTEM 

4.  CEREBRAL  HAEMORRHAGE 

In  treating  cases  of  cerebral  haemorrhage  it  is  essential 
to  avoid  everything  that  might  possibly  aggravate  the 
condition  of  the  patient  by  unnecessary  shaking  of  the 
patient's  body.  But,  when  all  precautions  against  a 
renewed  bleeding  have  been  taken,  it  is  of  great  import- 
ance from  the  first  days  of  the  illness  to  prevent  the 
formation  of  contractures.  Gentle  upward  stroking  of 
the  affected  arm  and  leg,  and  very  gentle  and  slow  passive 
movements,  performed  without  disturbing  the  rest  of 
the  patient,  reduce  the  muscular  spasm.  Later  on, 
when  the  danger  of  another  apoplectic  stroke  has 
become  considerably  smaller,  a  more  energetic  treatment 
can  be  carried  out.  It  will  be  found  that  much  better 
results  can  be  obtained  easily  when  the  necessary 
measures,  as  described,  have  been  taken  immediately. 
No  time  and  energy  are  thus  wasted  on  the  correction 
of  contractures,  which,  if  neglected,  become  a  source 
of  annoyance  to  the  patient  as  well  as  to  the  medical 
attendant. 

This  is  particularly  the  case  with  the  upper  extremity, 
which  generally  becomes  readily  deformed,  probably  on 
account  of  the  greater  range  of  movements  possible  in  its 
joints,  as  compared  with  those  of  the  lower  extremity,  and 
on  account  of  the  different  groups  of  muscles  affected. 

In  the  arm  the  chief  muscles  paralysed  are  the  exten- 
sors, therefore  the  resulting  deformity  will  take  the 
shape  of  a  multiple  flexion  ;  at  the  elbow,  wrist,  and 
finger- joints.  In  the  lower  extremity  it  is  the  flexors 
of  the  thigh  and  the  extensors  of  the  foot  that  suffer 


ORGANIC  113 

most.  The  issuing  contracture  is  here  never  so  great 
as  in  the  arm,  but  the  knee  is  mostly  extended  and 
the  ankle  flexed,  causing  the  characteristic  dragging 
of  the  foot,  and  swinging  it  round  in  a  half-circle  in 
walking. 

Should  the  tendency  to  contractures  be  great  in  spite 
of  all  the  steps  taken,  the  application  of  light  splints 
will  be  indicated,  and  the  limbs  should  be  put  up  in 
slightly  over-corrected  positions.  Massage  is,  of  course, 
applied  daily. 

The  use  of  paralysed  limbs  in  these  cases  can  to  a 
great  extent  be  reacquired  by  an  adequate  education 
of  the  nervous  tracts,  because  there  is  no  primary 
atrophy  of  muscles,  the  lesion  being  that  of  the  upper 
neuron.  Muscular  atrophy  in  these  cases  is  a  secondary 
symptom,  produced  exclusively  through  want  of  proper 
exercises. 

Speech  disturbances,  often  met  with  in  cases  of  right- 
sided  hemiplegia,  require  similar  attention.  The  pro- 
nunciation of  single  consonants  must  be  practised  with 
great  perseverance,  the  use  of  a  mirror  being  here  of 
considerable  service,  as  it  shows  the  patients  how  to 
shape  the  mouth. 

Though  the  extent  of  hemiplegia  may  become  reduced 
within  a  month,  the  picture  described  above  shows 
what  commonly  remains  as  a  permanent  result  of 
cerebral  haemorrhage,  if  nothing  has  been  done  to  coun- 
teract the  deforming  rigidity  of  the  limbs. 

Exactly  the  same  may  be  said  with  regard  to  a 
hemiplegia  following  thrombosis  or  embolism,  due  to  the 
softening  of  the  brain,  or  even  with  regard  to  certain 


114  NERVOUS  SYSTEM 

cases  of  brain  syphilis,  as  I  had  an  opportunity  recently 
to  observe. 


5.  NEURITIS 

In  neuritis  there  is  hardly  any  other  way  of  relieving 
the  pain  and  counteracting  or  combating  the  atrophy 
that  is  as  reliable  as  massage. 

The  stroking  and  passive  movements  here  applied 
must  be  of  the  gentlest  kind  at  the  outset,  but  as  soon 
as  the  tenderness  has  been  lessened,  and  atrophy  has 
begun  to  make  its  appearance,  massage,  exercises,  and 
nerve  vibrations  must  be  carried  out  energetically,  in 
order  to  prevent  deformity  from  contracture,  which 
may  attain  considerable  dimensions. 

Nerve  friction  or  nerve  vibration  as  practised  in 
Sweden,  and  advocated  by  some  specialists  as  being 
eminently  useful  in  restoring  nerve  function,  should  be 
applied  in  every  case  of  peripheral  or  central  palsy. 
This  manipulation  consists  of  pressure  exercised  on  the 
nerve  trunks  and  on  the  bigger  nerve  branches,  by 
placing  the  tips  of  one  or  two  fingers  on  the  nerve,  and 
thus  exciting  vibratory  movements,  and  rolling  the 
fingers  over  the  nerve,  if  it  is  a  superficial  one,  such  as 
the  ulnar  nerve  near  the  trochlea,  or  the  peroneal 
nerve  close  to  the  capitulum  fibulae,  Vibrations  are 
applied  all  along  the  course  of  the  affected  nerve  or 
nerves.  It  is  plain,  however,  that  this  cannot  be  a 
very  easy  performance,  even  to  an  accomplished 
anatomist.  Benefit  may  chiefly  be  expected  when 
the  nerves  treated  are  situated  at  such  places  where 


ORGANIC  115 

they  cairbe  directly  felt,  such  as  the  two  just  mentioned 
ones,  and  where  they  can  be  pressed  against  the  bone. 

Muscular  reaction  can  sometimes  be  obtained  by  this 
kind  of  mechanical  stimuli  in  cases  where  the  electric 
excitability  is  practically  extinguished. 

Nerve  friction  of  the  type  described  must  be  repeated 
every  day  at  least  a  hundred  times,  if  it  is  to  be  of 
any  use. 

In  neuritis  massage  may  be  advantageously  combined 
with  the  application  of  radiant  heat. 


6.  LESIONS  OF  PERIPHERAL  NERVES 
(a)  CEREBRAL  NERVES 

The  facial  and  the  spinal  accessory  are  the  only  two 
cerebral  nerves  which,  when  paralysed,  may  successfully 
be  treated  by  mechano-therapeutics. 

A  case  of  facial  palsy  I  treated  some  time  ago 
convinced  me  of  the  great  usefulness  of  exercises  in 
lesions  of  the  seventh  nerve,  even  in  very  obstinate 
cases.  The  patient  contracted  a  cold,  and  developed 
Bell's  palsy.  Several  months  elapsed  between  the 
occurrence  of  the  nerve  trouble  and  the  time  I  saw 
the  girl.  The  nerve  did  not  react  at  all  to  either  of 
the  electric  currents  ;  the  affected  muscles  responded 
very  sluggishly  to  galvanism,  being  quite  indifferent 
to  faradism.  No  voluntary  contraction  was  possible 
in  this  case.  In  spite  of  a  regular  treatment  by  com- 
bined current  during  a  few  months  the  reaction  of 
degeneration  would  not  improve.  Attempts  were 


116  NERVOUS  SYSTEM 

therefore  made  to  teach  the  patient  to  exercise  her 
facial  muscles  before  the  looking-glass.  In  order  to 
counteract  the  tendency  of  the  sound  side  to  a  dis- 
figuring deformity,  and  at  the  same  time  to  give  the 
paralysed  muscles  a  chance  of  resting  in  the  contracted 
position,  strips  of  adhesive  plaster  were  applied  to  the 
face  so  as  to  bring  the  two  ends  of  the  overstretched 
muscles  together.  Battery  treatment  was  carried  out 
simultaneously,  and  it  was  applied  several  times  a 
week. 

Within  a  few  weeks  after  the  patient  had  begun 
to  practise  her  mimic  exercises,  consisting  of  shutting 
her  eyes,  lifting  the  corner  of  her  mouth  and  drawing 
her  mouth  to  the  affected  side,  her  facial  muscles  com- 
menced slowly  to  react  to  faradism,  and  the  patient 
progressed  so  favourably  that  the  treatment  could  be 
stopped  after  another  two  months  had  passed  ;  the 
condition  of  the  face  had  then  become  almost  normal. 
There  was  a  slight  difference  in  the  promptness  of 
electrical  reaction  as  compared  with  the  sound  side, 
but  nobody  who  did  not  know  the  girl  could  tell  on 
which  side  the  face  had  been  paralysed.  Whistling, 
showing  the  upper  teeth,  closing  the  eyes,  and  all  the 
emotional  movements  were  performed  quite  correctly. 
Of  course,  there  was  no  deformity  whatever  when  the 
treatment  was  finished,  although  there  had  already  been 
a  marked  deviation  of  the  mouth  when  the  case  was 
first  seen. 

Cases  of  paralysis  of  the  spinal  accessory  should  be 
treated  on  similar  lines.  Here  the  exercises  comprise 
shrugging  of  the  shoulders,  respiratory  movements,  and 


ORGANIC  117 

elevation  of  the  arm,  as  well  as  rotation  of  the  head. 
Massage,  consisting  of  kneading  and  hacking  of  the  upper 
portion  of  the  trapezius  (see  Fig.  21)  and  the  sterno- 
mastoid,  as  well  as  sawing  manipulations  carried  out 
with  the  ulnar  border  of  the  hand  (Fig.  30),  should  be 
given  every  day. 


FIG.  30. — MASSAGE  OF  THE 
NECK. 

Sawing  movements,  which  are  carried  out 
with  one  hand,  whilst  the  other  one  steadies 
the  head  of  the  patient. 

When  an  operation  has  been  performed  with  the 
view  to  establish  nerve  anastomosis,  then  the  indication 
for  subsequent  passive  and  active  exercises  is  quite 
obvious. 

(b)  SPINAL  NERVES 

Hie  methods  employed  in  cases  of  peripheral  nerve 
lesions  are  similar  to  those  applied  to  neuritis.  Massage 
of  the  affected  muscles  and  nerves  as  described  above, 
plus  passive  and  voluntary  movements,  should  be 
regarded  as  infinitely  more  important  than  the  electrical 
treatment.  However,  the  best  results  will  be  obtained 
by  a  combination  of  the  mechano-  and  electro-thera- 
peutic measures. 


us  NERVOUS  SYSTEM 

The  importance  and  the  absolute  necessity  of  pre- 
venting contractures  so  frequently  resulting  from  peri- 
pheral nerve  lesions  must  always  be  borne  in  mind 
when  treating  these  cases. 

Operations  for  nerve  suture  or  nerve  anastomosis  in 
cases  of  nerve  division  should  always  be  followed  by 
exercises  of  the  corresponding  muscles,  as  there  is  no 
contra-indication  to  mechanic  treatment  whatsoever. 


7.  NEURALGIA 

Most  of  the  neuralgic  pains  are  often  associated  with 
rheumatism,  and  in  many  cases  the  nerves  themselves 
are  found  to  participate  in  the  inflammatory  process  ; 
it  is  best  therefore  to  discuss  neuralgia  jointly  with  the 
organic  nervous  diseases,  and  not  to  consider  these 
complaints  as  purely  functional  disorders. 

Pain  in  most  of  these  cases  is  due  to  a  pressure  on 
the  nerves,  exercised  by  the  inflammatory  exudations, 
which  are  actually  found  in  and  around  the  nerves, 
and  are  proved  by  anatomo-pathological  investigations 
to  consist  mainly  of  serous  infiltrations  and  cellular 
elements.  In  old-standing  cases  there  may  be  even  a 
certain  amount  of  fibrosis. 

Amongst  the  commonest  localisations  of  this  trouble 
are  the  following  : 

Cervico-occipital,  involving  the  posterior  branches  of 
the  upper  cervical  nerves,  especially  the  inferior  occipital. 
There  is  usually  a  tender  point  at  the  emergence  of 
this  nerve,  midway  between  the  mastoid  process  and 
the  first  cervical  vertebra.  The  occipitalis  major  and 


ORGANIC  119 

minor  as  well  as  the  auricularis  magnus  nerve  are  also 
often  painful  at  their  exits  from  the  occipital  fascia. 
Pain  in  these  cases  is  situated  at  the  back  of  the 
head  and  of  the  neck,  and  forms  one  of  the  types  of 
headache. 

Hard  and  tender  nodules  are  frequently  discovered 
on  careful  examination,  corresponding  to  the  points 
where  the  nerves  become  superficial.  Massage  of  these 
painful  areas  is  recognised  to  be  the  most  efficacious 
mode  of  treatment,  and  though  gentle  at  first,  it  must 
be  energetically  applied,  until  a  hard  pressure  exercised 
on  the  points  does  not  produce  more  than  the  normal 
sensations  of  pressure  on  a  nerve.  Those,  however, 
are  entirely  different  from  the  heavy  dull  aching  and 
gnawing  or  boring  pain  in  neuralgia.  The  treatment 
may  require  several  weeks,  especially  if  the  case  is 
inveterate. 

In  patients  complaining  of  frontal  headaches  I  found 
the  supra- trochlear  nerves  affected.  The  trochlea  of 
the  superior  oblique  muscle  of  the  eye  appears  to  be 
a  common  seat  of  infiltrations  in  rheumatic  subjects. 
Such  infiltrations  must  necessarily  cause  pressure  on 
the  neighbouring  nerve  branches  (see  The  Practitioner, 
June  1913  :  "  Headache  and  its  Treatment"). 

Vibratory  massage  applied  t.o  the  inner  part  of  the 
orbit  by  means  of  a  motor,  whose  shaking  movements 
are  transmitted  through  the  hand  of  the  person  adminis- 
tering treatment,  tends  to  hasten  the  absorption  of  the 
inflammatory  products,  and  thus  relieves  the  pain.  The 
number  of  cases  I  examined  before  and  after  my  first 
publication  on  this  subject  referred  to  above,  is  so  con- 


120  NERVOUS  SYSTEM 

siderable  that  I  cannot  sufficiently  emphasise  the  great 
usefulness  of  massage  in  frontal  headaches.  Nearly 
all  my  cases  showed  great  tenderness  of  the  trochlea 
to  a  slight  pressure,  and  were  markedly  relieved  after 
a  comparatively  short  treatment  (Fig.  31). 


FIG.  31. — THE  ABOVE  DIAGRAM  SHOWS 
THE  POSITION  OF  THE  THUMB  WHICH 
ENABLES  ONE  BEST  TO  EXAMINE  THE 
TROCHLEA  OF  THE  SUPERIOR  OBLIQUE 
M.  IN  ONF.'S  OWN  SELF. 

The  supra-orbital  and  the  infra-orbital  nerves  are 
also  often  involved  in  facial  neuralgia.  This,  however, 
is  to  my  knowledge  not  nearly  so  often  the  case  as 
compared  with  the  supra-trochlear  nerve.  Pressure  on 
these  nerves  at  their  emergences  is  always  followed  by 
relief,  which  is  more  obvious  and  lasting  than  that 
obtained  from  a  sole  administration  of  salicylates. 

Forcible  kneading  of  the  tender  points,  executed  by 
the  tips  of  both  thumbs,  will  be  found  very  helpful 
in  most  cases. 

In  brachial  neuralgia  it  is  most  commonly  either  the 
circumflex  or  the  ulnar  nerve  that  is  at  fault.  In  the 
first  case  the  pain  is  situated  in  the  deltoid  ;  in  the 
second,  tenderness  is  complained  of  about  the  elbow 


ORGANIC  121 

joint  just  at  the  point  where  the  ulnar  nerve  winds 
itself  round  the  lower  end  of  the  humerus.  It  is  often 
met  with  in  cases  suffering  from  muscular  or  arthritic 
rheumatism,  or  in  those  patients  that  sustained  a  trauma 
at  some  time  or  other.  It  is  then  most  likely  due  to 
an  extension  of  the  trouble  from  the  vicinity,  or  to  the 
pressure  of  the  exudates  on  the  nerves. 

Massage  is  always  found  to  bring  relief  to  those  pains, 
but  the  period  of  recovery  is  sometimes  extended  over 
months,  particularly  when  the  case  has  been  neglected. 

In  sciatica  the  pain  is  either  caused  by  neuritis  of 
the  great  sciatic  nerve,  or  it  may  be  due  to  infiltrations 
of  the  glutaei  muscles,  the  swelling  pressing  on  the 
big  nerve  trunk.  Massage  requires  here  considerable 
physical  strength  on  the  part  of  the  person  in  charge 
of  the  case.  Kneading  of  the  buttock  and  of  the  thigh 
is  best  executed  by  the  knuckles  of  the  fingers  of  both 
hands,  the  fist  being  firmly  clenched.  The  patient 
assumes  a  recumbent  posture,  lying  on  his  face. 

Exercises  comprise  here  those  of  the  trunk,  such  as 
bending,  and  of  the  leg,  such  as  flexion  of  the  thigh 
with  fully  extended  knees.  The  range  of  these  move- 
ments is  steadily  increased  with  every  day. 

Coccydynia,  which  as  far  as  its  obstinacy  is  con- 
cerned is  one  of  the  worst  complaints  known,  often 
results  from  a  cold  or  a  bruise.  Manipulations  tending 
to  loosen  the  coccyx,  and  to  help  to  disperse  the  residue 
of  either  inflammatory  or  traumatic  origin,  will  be  found 
very  helpful.  The  forefinger  of  one  hand  is  introduced 
into  the  rectum,  the  other  hand  steadies  the  bone  from 
outside. 


122  NERVOUS  SYSTEM 

Podalgia,  or  painful  feet,  is  in  the  majority  of  cases 
caused  by  a  weakening  of  the  arch,  thus  representing 
the  first  stage  of  pes  valgus,  sive  planus,  and  as  such 
it  is  directly  amenable  to  mechano-therapeutic  agents. 
Massage  of  the  foot  and  leg  muscles,  and  exercises 
which  were  described  more  in  detail  under  the  treat- 
ment of  flat-foot,  will  in  most  cases  bring  a  prompt 
relief. 

The  same  should  also  be  practised,  and  given  a  good 
trial,  in  cases  of  metatarsalgia,  before  recourse  is  had 
to  an  operation. 


FUNCTIONAL   DISEASES 
1.  PARALYSIS  AGITANS 

Cases  of  Parkinson's  palsy  have  been  reported  which 
were  greatly  ameliorated  by  gymnastic  treatment  com- 
bined with  muscular  kneading  and  stroking,  though 
this  condition  has  so  far  defied  any  other  kind  of  treat- 
ment. The  only  case  I  treated  showed  signs  of  im- 
provement with  every  day,  but,  unfortunately,  treat- 
ment in  this  case  did  not  last  very  long,  the  patient 
being  unable  to  continue  attendance  at  the  hospital. 

Whether  the  effect  of  mechanic  treatment  is  purely 
suggestive,  or  whether  it  has  a  real  therapeutic  value, 
cannot  and  need  not  be  decided  as  long  as  the  nature 
of  the  disease  itself  is  obscure. 

Resisted  movements  were  found  of  the  greatest  use 
in  this  case  as  a  means  of  steadying  the  tremor. 


FUNCTIONAL  DISEASES  123 

2.  CHOREA 

The  method  of  treating  St.  Vitus's  dance  with  gym- 
nastics is  becoming  more  and  more  popular,  but  great 
care  must  be  here  exercised  both  with  regard  to  the 
selection  of  suitable  cases,  as  well  as  to  the  kind  of 
treatment.  One  rule  must  be  unconditionally  adhered 
to,  and  this'  is  individual  treatment  of  every  child,  away 
from  school,  but  never  together  with  other  children. 

We  know  that  the  psychic  moment  in  chorea  is  of 
great  significance.  We  often  cannot  even  determine  the 
extent  of  its  importance  as  long  as  the  patient  is  not 
entirely  separated  from  the  atmosphere  of  the  school 
and  its  home.  This  alone  categorically  demands  an 
interruption  of  school  work.  On  the  other  hand, 
choreatic  individuals  differ  so  much  from  one  another 
that  it  is  quite  impossible  to  treat  them  all  on  exactly 
the  same  lines.  They  differ  very  much  physically  as 
well  as  psychically,  and  therefore  the  measures  applied 
to  them  must  vary  accordingly. 

The  more  severe  cases  of  chorea  ought  not  to  be 
treated  by  gymnastics,  but  should  receive  massage  alone. 
General  massage  should  be  carried  out  in  the  way 
described  under  constitutional  diseases.  Stroking  of  the 
limbs  is  very  soothing,  having  a  remarkable  sedative 
influence  on  the  inco-ordinate  movements.  If  possible, 
the  child  should  be  confined  to  bed  for  a  few  weeks  and 
secluded  from  the  rest  of  the  family.  The  effect  of 
massage  combined  with  absolute  rest  is  always  much 
more  prompt  than  if  given  under  the  ordinary  un- 
favourable conditions. 


124  NERVOUS  SYSTEM 

Lighter  cases  should  receive  mechano-therapeutic 
treatment  in  a  less  restricted  form.  Resisted  move- 
ments will  then  be  found  most  useful.  The  degree  of 
resistance  must,  of  course,  be  exactly  proportionate 
to  the  physical  resources  of  the  child,  so  that  no  undue , 
fatigue  shall  be  caused.  The  resisted  movements,  more 
than  any  others,  force  the  patient  to  direct  his  full 
attention  to  the  muscular  actions  performed,  and  teach 
him  to  carry  out  voluntary  movements  with  more 
precision. 

Complications  of  chorea,  such  as  endocarditis  in 
children  or  pregnancy  in  adult  women,  obviously  re- 
quire special  consideration. 

3.  OCCUPATION  NEUROSES 

Writer's  cramp  is  undoubtedly  the  commonest 
representative  of  this  group.  Much  can  be  done  to 
avoid  aggravation  of  this  condition  by  correcting  the 
position  of  the  arm  in  writing.  The  elbow  must  always 
be  supported  on  the  table,  and  must  serve  as  the  centre 
from  which  the  movements  originate  ;  neither  the  little 
finger  nor  the  wrist  should  be  used  in  that  sense.  Some- 
times the  change  of  the  penholder  may  bring  an  im- 
provement in  lighter  cases — a  thick  penholder  instead  of 
a  thin  one,  or  vice  versa.  Occasionally  it  is  found  that 
placing  the  pen  between  different  fingers  unaccustomed 
to  hold  it  brings  relief. 

Unless  scrivener's  palsy  is  due  to  some  mental  causes 
still  obscure  to  us,  it  appears  to  be  frequently  a  sign  of 
over-fatigue  of  those  muscles  which  are  involved  in  the 


FUNCTIONAL  DISEASES  125 

process  of  writing.  Hence  a  temporary  amelioration 
generally  follows  the  above-mentioned  suggestions. 

A  more  rational  and  a  more  effective  treatment,  how- 
ever, consists  of  complete  interdiction  of  any  writing, 
and  of  massage  applied  to  the  whole  arm  as  far  as  the 
shoulder,  resisted  movements  in  the  finger,  wrist,  and 
elbow  joints  being  carried  out  daily. 

The  patient  is  gradually  allowed  to  resume  writing 
within  a  fortnight  or  three  weeks. 

Masseur's  palsy — which,  strangely  enough,  not  only 
exists,  but  is  said  to  be  pretty  frequent,  especially  in 
Sweden,  where  some  work  almost  incessantly  for  ten 
hours  daily  and  even  more — affects  mainly  the  shoulder 
muscles.  It  manifests  itself  in  a  feeling  of  fatigue  and 
pain  all  around  the  shoulders,  and  an  inability  to  per- 
form movements  which  entail  a  strain  on  the  shoulder 
muscles. 

Treatment  consists  of  rest  and  avoidance  of  all  those 
actions  which  cause  dragging  of  the  affected  muscles. 
The  ideal  treatment  of  these  cases  is  rest  in  bed  and 
application  of  massage  to  the  overstrained  parts. 
Gradually  gymnastics  are  allowed,  but  great  caution 
is  to  be  observed  lest  the  pains  should  return.  In 
these  cases  the  use  of  electric  vibrators  ought  to  be  a 
boon  to  the  patients  just  as  the  use  of  typewriters  in 
the  foregoing  complaint. 

4.  HYSTERIA  AND  NEURASTHENIA 

The  significance  of  the  therapeutic  effect  of  massage 
in  these  two  troubles  was  fully  realised  by  Weir  Mitchell, 
and  also  constitutes  an  important  part  of  his  method. 


126  NERVOUS   SYSTEM 

It  is  intended  to  stimulate  the  metabolism,  and  by 
regulations  of  diet  to  lead  to  an  accumulation  of  fat 
in  the  body.  With  regard  to  neurasthenia,  and  par- 
ticularly with  regard  to  such  forms  of  it  as  are 
characterised  by  a  marked  loss  of  flesh  and  disappear- 
ance of  fat — instances  of  which  we  have  in  Glenard's 
disease  (enteroptosis)  and  in  the  movable  kidney — the 
beneficial  effect  of  such  treatment  is  obvious. 

In  more  serious  cases,  rest  in  bed  is  of  great  help  when 
massage  alone  should  be  applied  to  the  whole  body. 
This  is  given  in  the  way  found  suitable  in  constitutional 
disorders,  which  undoubtedly  resemble  neurasthenia  very 
closely. 

Exercises  are  prescribed  as  soon  as  the  patient's 
physical  strength  will  allow  it.  In  the  beginning  very 
gentle  and  passive,  later  on  active  and  resisted,  they 
have  to  be  given  for  several  weeks  or  months. 

Breathing  exercises  and  abdominal  massage  should 
always  be  practised,  because  of  their  direct  influence 
on  metabolism. 


III.   SPECIAL 
A.  GYNAECOLOGICAL  AND  OBSTETRICAL 

THE  following  points,  though  being  well  known  to 
every  man  in  the  profession,  may  be  mentioned  in 
connection  with  this  chapter. 

One  is  the  mechanic  stimulus  widely  adopted  in 
obstetrics  and  applied  to  the  uterus,  consisting  of 
rubbing  of  the  womb  through  the  abdominal  wall,  with 
the  object  of  preventing  post-partum  hcemorrhage.  This 
massage  is  carried  out  in  order  to  effect  a  better  con- 
traction of  the  uterine  muscle,  and  as  such  it  should 
be  performed  as  a  routine  measure  in  every  case  :  first 
after  the  child  has  been  born,  and  then  after  the  placenta 
has  been  expelled.  One  or  both  hands  are  placed  over 
the  fundus,  and  quick  rotatory  movements  are  executed 
with  a  fair  amount  of  vigour. 

The  same  manipulations  are  often  applied  in  cases 
of  protracted  labour,  when  due  to  defective  pains,  and 
it  is  remarkable  to  what  extent  and  with  what  prompt- 
ness contractions  follow  this  massage. 

Another  mechanic  factor  familiar  to  the  obstetrician, 
and  frequently  practised  by  him,  is  the  resuscitation 
of  asphyxiated  new-born  children.  It  is  based  on  the 
principles  of  our  breathing  exercises,  but  at  the  same 

127 


128    GYNAECOLOGICAL  AND   OBSTETRICAL 

time  use  is  being  made  here  of  the  law  of  gravitation. 
When  the  infant  is  held  up  by  the  shoulders,  his  thorax 
is  fully  expanded  ;  in  lifting  him  up,  his  head  down- 
wards, the  lower  part  of  his  body  becomes  suddenly 
bent.  The  thorax  thus  becomes  compressed,  and  a 
deep  expiration  results.  At  the  same  time  more 
favourable  conditions  are  created  for  the  escape  of 
mucus  from  the  trachea,  by  the  body  being  turned 
upside  down. 

The  introduction  of  mechano-therapeutics  into 
gynaecology  proper  was  accomplished  by  Thure  Brandt, 
the  Swedish  major,  some  forty  years  ago.  It  consists 
of  bimanual  manipulations  in  which  the  index  and  the 
middle  finger  of  one  hand  introduced  into  the  vagina 
steadies  the  portio,  whereas  the  other  hand  influences 
the  fundus  uteri  through  the  abdominal  parietes  by  a 
kind  of  kneading  and  pinching  movements.  Brandt 
and  his  followers  practised  gynaecological  massage  in 
cases  of  prolapse.,  uterine  displacements,  as  well  as  in  all 
chronic  inflammatory  conditions  of  the  uterus  itself,  and 
of  its  vicinity.  In  the  first-mentioned  complaint  the 
manipulations  are  intended  to  strengthen  the  uterine 
ligaments.  In  the  endo-  and  para-metritis  they  are 
meant  to  hasten  the  absorption  of  inflammatory  pro- 
ducts from  the  affected  areas,  and  to  loosen  the 
adhesions.  In  metritis  it  is  to  relieve  the  venous 
congestion,  and  thus  to  improve  the  circulation  in 
this  organ. 

Though  in  itself  quite  plausible  and  useful  in  suitable 
cases,  T.  Brandt's  methods  have  not  found  a  wider 
application,  especially  in  this  country,  on  account  of 


GYNECOLOGICAL  AND   OBSTETRICAL      129 

certain  objections  raised  here  and  there  by  the  medical 
profession.  The  objections  are  not  very  convincing  to 
those  who  consider  the  freedom  of  science  and  the 
well-being  of  their  patients  of  infinitely  more  vital  im- 
portance than  misdirected  ethical  scruples.  Certain 
precautions  directed  towards  the  protection  of  the 
profession  as  well  as  of  their  clientele,  are  always  indi- 
cated. On  the  other  hand,  however,  there  is  no  essential 
difference  between  the  ordinary  work  of  a  conscientious 
gynaecologist,  and  that  of  a  conscientious  man,  as  Thure 
Brandt  himself  undoubtedly  was.  At  any  rate,  this  was 
the  impression  I  gained  from  a  perusal  of  his  private 
notes  in  MSS.  to  be  found  in  the  Library  of  the  Central 
Institute  in  Stockholm. 

It  would  be  wiser  to  afford  more  opportunity  of  re- 
habilitation to  a  method  which,  though  not  always 
approved  by  some  authorities,  cannot  otherwise  but 
appeal  to  common  sense,  and  which  has  been  vindicated 
by  its  own  results. 

Massage  can  be  used  in  the  last  stages  of  pregnancy 
as  a  preventive  of  skin  cracks  (stride  gravidarum) , 
otherwise  readily  forming  on  the  abdomen,  and  some- 
times even  on  the  thighs.  The  skin  alone  ought  to  be 
here  the  subject  of  very  gentle  kneading  executed  with 
the  tips  of  the  fingers.  Also  the  nipples  of  the  breast 
require  similar  attention,  being  very  liable  to  suffer 
from  the  process  of  suckling,  if  not  previously  hardened 
by  rubbing  with  such  stimulants  as  methylated  spirits, 
which  should  be  commenced  about  six  weeks  before 
the  confinement  and  practised  every  day. 

With  regard  to  the  lower  extremities,  which  often 
9 


130    GYNECOLOGICAL  AND   OBSTETRICAL 

suffer  a  great  deal  from  oedema,  pains,  and  even  open 
wounds  as  the  result  of  varicose  veins,  it  must  be 
emphatically  pointed  out  that  stroking  and  kneading  of 
the  legs  are  strictly  indicated  in  order  to  cope  with  the 
congestion.  Exercises  of  the  legs  and  of  the  trunk  help 
to  restore  normal  circulatory  conditions  of  the  body, 
and  may  rightly  be  expected  to  diminish  the  risk  of 
thrombosis  of  the  femoral  veins,  this  much  dreaded 
complication  of  the  early  stages  of  puerperium.  Later 
on,  trunk  exercises  and  abdominal  massage  are  of 
great  service  as  restoring  the  strength  of  the  abdom- 
inal muscles,  which  in  most  cases  are  extremely 
weakened.  In  fact,  gentle  exercises,  such  as  voluntary 
contractions  of  the  ,recti  muscles  whilst  lying  in  bed, 
should  be  practised  from  the  second  day  after  par- 
turition. Also  small  sacks  filled  with  sand  may  be 
placed  on  the  stomach  after  a  few  days,  and  the  patient 
told  to  lift  them  by  contracting  the  abdominal  muscles. 
The  perineal  muscles  may  be  trained  even  before  the 
confinement  by  voluntary  contractions,  imitating  those 
which  generally  accompany  the  act  of  defecation  and 
those  which  serve  to  keep  back  the  contents  of  the 
rectum.  This  may  be  practised  several  times  a  day, 
the  object  here  being  prevention  of  subsequent  relaxa- 
tion of  the  perineum,  which  favours  prolapse  of  the  uterus. 


B.  OTOLOGICAL  AND  OPHTHALMOLOGICAL 

MASSAGE  has  found  its  way  even  to  such  special  branc'hes 
of  our  science  as  otology  and  ophthalmology.  Obviously 
it  has  here  but  a  limited  scope.  Nevertheless,  it  is  the 


OTOLOGICAL  AND  OPHTHALMOLOGICAL    131 

ear  and  eye  specialists  themselves  that  advise  the 
application  of  massage  in  certain  complaints. 

Vibratory  massage  applied  to  the  mastoid  process 
by  means  of  an  electric  motor  is  advocated  by  some 
as  beneficial  in  cases  of  otosclerosis.  The  aim  of  the 
treatment  is  here  loosening  of  the  ossicles,  and  it 
appears  that  massage  is  the  only  way  of  influencing 
this  dreadful  disease.  Vibratory  massage  can  also  be 
advantageously  applied  in  cases  of  chronic  otitis  media. 

Massage  used  to  be  applied  by  oculists  in  cases  of 
immature  cataract  in  order  to  hasten  the  degenerative 
process  going  on  in  the  lens  by  rubbing  it  with  Daviel's 
spoon  through  the  cornea.  A  few  days  after  the  lens 
could  be  extracted. 

C.    RHINO-    AND    LARYNGOLOGICAL 

SOME  troubles  affecting  the  throat  such  as  laryngitis 
and  pharyngitis  have  been  dealt  with  jointly  with  other 
affections  of  the  air-passages  in  the  chapter  on  the 
respiratory  system,  and  therefore  need  not  be  described 
here  again. 

With  regard  to  the  nose  troubles,  one  or  two  things 
have  to  be  mentioned. 

Firstly,  massage  has  been  applied  to  the  nasal  mucous 
membrane  in  cases  of  atrophic  rhinitis  with  the  aim  of 
stimulating  the  regeneration  of  the  tissues.  Gentle 
friction  has  been  exercised  on  the  mucous  membrane 
by  means  of  a  probe,  whose  point  has  been  protected 
by  a  small  quantity  of  wool.  It  is  obvious  that  such 
treatment  can  yield  more  satisfactory  results  only  after 
a.  certain  period, 


132  RHINO-  AND  LARYNGOLOGICAL 

Secondly,  we  adopt  mechano-therapeutics  in  the  after- 
treatment  of  cases  which  have  undergone  an  operation 
for  tonsils  and  adenoids.  The  object  of  these  measures 
is  mainly  an  improvement  of  breathing,  which  is 
always  more  or  less  impaired  in  these  cases,  owing  to 
the  obstruction  of  the  naso-pharynx.  The  resulting 
abnormality  is  here  a  double  one  :  breathing  becomes 
shallow,  and  the  air  passes  through  the  mouth  instead 
of  through  the  nose.  What  we  have  to  do  is,  there- 
fore, to  teach  these  subjects  (mostly  children)  how  to 
breathe  deeply  and  through  the  nose. 

Breathing  exercises  such  as  have  been  described 
under  scoliosis  treatment  and  also  in  connection 
with  respiratory  troubles,  are  applicable  here.  Class 
exercises  1  can  be  adopted  with  a  greater  benefit  than 
elsewhere,  since  this  type  of  patient  as  a  rule  does 
not  require  much  individual  attention.  Such  exercises 
will  consist  of  the  said  movements  carried  out  while 
standing,  and  deep  inspiration  to  be  performed  through 
the  nose,  followed  by  expiration  through  the  mouth 
without  holding  the  breath  between  the  movements. 
Breathing  exercises  must  necessarily  be  performed 
slowly,  though  regularly,  and  according  to  the  instruc- 
tions of  the  teacher. 

The  effect  of  this  kind  of  treatment  is  a  more  complete 
ventilation  of  the  lungs,  an  increased  vital  capacity  of 
the  thorax,  and  at  the  same  time  it  helps  to  exterminate 
the  faulty  habit  of  mouth-breathing. 

In  order  to  achieve  better  results,  breathing  exercises 
must  be  performed  daily. 

1  As  described  on  p.  64. 


DERMATOLOGICAL  133 

D.    DERMATOLOGICAL 

OUT  of  the  vast  number  of  skin  troubles  only  a  few 
can  be  influenced  advantageously  by  massage. 

Alopecia,  when  not  of  parasitic  origin,  is  amenable 
to  a  treatment  of  which  the  object  is  to  raise  the  vitality 
of  the  scalp.  This  is  effected  by  manual  kneading  and 
friction  applied  with  the  tips  of  the  fingers  in  order  to 
loosen  the  scalp,  to  produce  an  active  hypersemia,  and 
thus  to  stimulate  the  hair  follicles,  and  to  promote  the 
growth  of  the  hair.  If  possible,  massage  of  the  scalp 
should  be  practised  every  day  once  or  twice,  the  patients 
being  often  able  to  administer  it  themselves,  when 
properly  instructed. 

Massage  of  the  face  is  nowadays  more  and  more 
adopted  as  a  rational  treatment  of  acne.  What  had  been 
termed  "  plastic  massage  "  by  some  French  authors 
should  be  applied  to  the  face  in  order  to  reduce  the 
amount  of  blackheads,  and  to  prevent  the  formation 
of  pustules.  This  massage  consists  of  gentle  pinching 
and  kneading  of  the  face  between  the  tips  of  the  fingers. 
The  skin  has  to  be  lifted  off  the  cheeks  and  off  the  chin, 
as  well  as  off  the  forehead,  and  carefully  submitted  to 
the  above-mentioned  process.  This  is  very  beneficial 
as  a  means  of  opening  the  many  cutaneous  glands  which, 
being  blocked  by  the  accumulated  debris,  give  rise  to 
the  formation  of  the  two  above-mentioned  symptoms. 

E.    DENTAL 

MASSAGE  has  been  advocated  by  eminent  dentists  in 
cases  of  chronic  gingivitis,  a  condition  much  more  wide- 


134  DENTAL 

spread  and  important  than  is  generally  supposed.  The 
main  features  of  this  complaint  are  a  loss  of  tonus  in 
the  gums,  leading  to  a  weakening  of  the  teeth,  and  a 
state  of  chronic  sepsis  in  the  mouth. 

Massage  here  is  prescribed  with  the  object  of  strength- 
ening the  gums  and  in  assisting  a  free  elimination  of  the 
discharge.  This  is  effected  by  a  vigorous  kneading  of 
the  gums,  the  tips  of  the  fingers  performing  gliding 
movements  in  an  upward  direction  in  the  case  of  the 
lower  jaw,  and  in  a  downward  direction  in  the  case  of 
the  upper  jaw.  The  fingers  are  from  time  to  time  dipped 
into  pure  spirits  of  wine,  the  latter  adding  still  more 
to  the  hardening  of  the  tissues. 

This  kind  of  massage  ought  to  be  practised  every 
evening  by  the  patients  themselves  after  a  thorough 
cleansing  of  the  mouth  has  been  performed.  Person- 
ally, I  had  the  opportunity  of  convincing  myself  of  the 
efficacy  of  this  treatment. 


CONCLUDING  REMARKS 

SHOULD  the  foregoing  pages  have  succeeded  in  raising 
the  interest  of  some  of  their  readers,  and  in  directing 
it  towards  a  closer  and  more  unprejudiced,  but  a  per- 
sonal study  of  mechano-therapeutics,  the  author  will 
feel  that  his  efforts  have  not  been  quite  futile.  For  it 
always  was  his  intention  to  acquaint  a  wider  circle  of 
his  colleagues  with  a  therapeutic  factor  which  has 
been  badly  neglected  by  the  profession. 

Massage  has  up  to  quite  recently  been  in  the  hands 
of  quacks  and  unqualified  persons,  and  on  that  account 
medical  men  have  been  accustomed  to  look  down  upon 
it  as  something  beneath  their  professional  dignity.  This 
is,  however,  not  the  right  way  of  tackling  a  new 
method.  Some  two  or  three  hundred  years  ago  surgery 
was  in  the  hands  of  barbers,  but  nowadays  this  does 
not  prevent  anybody  from  considering  it  one  of  the 
most  favourite  branches  of  our  work. 

The  larger  public  was  of  yore  inclined  to  believe  in 
the  efficacy  of  massage,  and  the  quacks  must  have  un- 
doubtedly been  of  some  service  to  them.  Although 
the  results  were  sometimes  anything  but  satisfactory, 
such  failures  might  have  been  easily  avoided,  if  the 
medical  profession  had  thought  of  a  thorough  investi- 
gation of  this  matter,  instead  of  pronouncing  them- 
135 


136  CONCLUDING  REMARKS 

selves  far  above  it,  and  treating  massage  as  a  quantite 
neglig  cable. 

Lack  of  scientific  training  obviously"  made  ignorant 
people  apply  exactly  the  same  treatment  in  all  cases 
without  discrimination,  and  though  they  obtained 
excellent  results  in  some,  they  had  disastrous  failures 
in  other  cases,  since  massage,  harmless  as  it  may 
appear,  can  sometimes  cause  very  sad  complications. 
Pyaemic  metastasis  has  occurred  after  an  abscess  had 
been  submitted  to  rubbing,  and  a  general  peritonitis 
followed  the  massage  of  an  acute  appendicitis.  Gross 
displacement  of  bone  fragments  resulted  in  fractures 
treated  by  people  who  had  no  knowledge  of  surgery. 
A  case  I  saw  once  exhibited  osseous  union  of  the  femur 
at  an  angle  of  120°,  as  proved  by  a  radiograph. 

The  results  of  mechano-therapeutic  treatment  would 
become  positively  excellent  if  medical  men  would  take 
up  this  work  themselves,  and  rely  less  on  others.  It 
would  be  a  greater  benefit  to  the  public,  as  well  as  a 
greater  advantage  to  the  profession,  if  the  motto 
"More  medicine  in  massage,  and  more  massage  in 
medicine,"  were  generally  adopted. 


REFERENCES 

THE  literary  material  dealing  with  our  subject  is  so  copious 
that  it  is  only  possible  to  consider  here  the  main  sources 
of  reference,  and  only  those  of  a  more  recent  date. 

BENNETT,  SIR  W.  :    Lectures  on  the  Use  of  Massage  and 

Early  Passive  Movements  in  Recent  Fractures  and  other 

Common  Surgical  Injuries.    3rd  Edition.    London,  1903. 
ESTRADERE  :    Du   Massage,   ses  Effets   physiol.    et   therap. 

These  de  Paris,  1863. 
FRENKEL,  H.  S.  :   The  Treatment  of  Tabetic  Ataxia  by  Means 

of  Systematic  Exercises.     English   Translation   by   L. 

Freyberger.     London  and  New  York,    1905. 
HOFFA,     A.  :      Lehrbuch     der     Orthopifdischen     Chirurgie. 

Stuttgart,   1898. 

JOSEPH,  MAX.  :    Handbuch  der  Kosmetik.     Leipzig,  1912. 
KELLETT-SMITH,  :    Lateral  Spinal  Curvature  and  Flat  Foot 

and  their  Treatment  by  Exercises.     London. 
LOVETT  :  Lateral  Curvature  of  the  Spine  and  Round  Shoulders. 

London,    1912. 

LUCAS- CHAMPIONNI  ERE  :     Precis   de   Traitement  des   Frac- 
tures par  le  Massage  et  la  Mobilisation.     Paris,  1910. 
MOSENGEIL  :    Ueber  Massage,  deren  Technik  und  Indication. 

Langenbeck's  Archiv.  filr  klinische  Chirurgie.     Band  19. 
NORSTROM  :  Muskel-Rheumatismus. 
OSLER,  SIR  W.  :    The  Principles  and  Practice  of  Medicine. 

London,   1909. 
PENZOLDT  and  STINTZING  :    Handbuch  Spezialler  Therapie. 

Band    5.      Jena,    1896   RAMDOHR  :    Allgemeine   Gym- 

nastik  und  Massage. 

137 


138  REFERENCES 

ROMER,  F.,  and  CBEASY,  E. :  Bone-setting  and  the  Treatment 

of  Painful  Joints.     London,   1911. 
THOMSON  and  MILES  :    Manual  of  Surgery,  Vol.  I.  and  II. 

Edinburgh  and  London,  1909. 
THORNE  THORNS,  LESLIE  :    Nauheim  Treatment  of  Diseases 

of  the  Heart  and  Circulation.     London. 
WIDE,   A :       Handbuch     der     Medicinischen      Gymnastik. 

German  Translation.     Wiesbaden,  1897. 


INDEX 


ABDOMINAL  exercises,  97 
Abdominal  massage,  95 
Acne,  133 

Active  movements,  11 
Adenoids,  exercises  in,   132 
Adhesions,  pleuritic,  90 
Adhesions  after  bruises,  49 
Adhesions  in  traumatic  syno- 
JVitis,  47 
Adiposity,  99 
Alopecia,  133 
Amyotrophic   lateral  sclerosis, 

108 

Ansemia,  102 
Ankle,  fracture  of,  34 
Ankle,  massage  of,  35 
Ankle,  sprained,  45 
Anterior  polio-myelitis,  109 
Arthritic  conditions,  47 
A  trophic  rhinitis,  131 

Bedsores,  54 
Bell's  palsy,  115 
Bennett's  fracture,  26 
Bladder  troubles  in  ataxia,  108 
"  Bone-setting,"  48 
Brachial  neuralgia,  120 
Brain  syphilis,  114 
Bronchitis,  chronic,  89 
Bruises,  48 

Callus,  excessive,  40 
Catarrhal  prostatitis,  54 
Corvico-occipital  neuralgia,  118 
Chorea,  123 
Circulatory  system,  76 
Class  exercises  in  scoliosis,  64 
Clavicle,  fracture  of,  12 
Coccydynia,  121 


Colles's  fracture,  21 
Comminuted  fracture  of  radius, 

24 

Compound  fracture  of  leg,  32 
Concentric  movements,  111 
Concluding  remarks,  135 
Congenital  deformities,  72 
Constipation,  94 
Constitutional  diseases,  99 
Contracture,  Volkmann's,   19 
Contractures    in    cerebral    hae- 
morrhage, 112 

Contractures  in  neuritis,  114 
Centra-indications,  3 
Contusions  of  soft  parts,  48 
Coracoid  process,  fracture  of, 
17 

Debility,  102 
Deformities,  55 
Deltoid,  massage  of,  14 
Dental,  133 
Dermatological,  133 
Diabetes,  99 
Digestive  system,  92 
Dislocations,  41 

Elbow,  fractures  of,  20 
—  sprained,  43 
Elevation  of  limbs,  11 
Embolism,  cerebral,  113 
Embolism,  pulmonary,  40 
Enteroptosis,  126 
Excentric  movements,  111 
Excessive  callus,  40 
Exercises  in  scoliosis,  58 
Exercises  in  tabes,  106 
Exercises  in  tonsils  and  ade- 
noids, 132 


139 


140 


INDEX 


Facial  neuralgia,  120 

Facial  paralysis,  115 

Femur,  fracture  of  neck,  27 

Femur,  fracture  of  shaft,  28 

Fibrositis,  50 

Fibula,  fracture  of,  32 

Flat  foot,  70 

Fractures,  5 

Fractures  of  lower  extremity, 

27 
Fractures  of  upper  extremity, 

12 

Friction,  23 
Frontal  headache,  1 1 9 
Functional  diseases  of  nervous 

system,  122 

General  considerations,   1 
General  massage,  101 
Genu  varurn  and   valgum,    68 
Gingivitis,  chronic,  133 
Gout,  99 
Gynaecological,  127 

Hacking,  15 

Headache,  119 

Heart  massage,  diseases  of,  76 

Hip,  sprained,  44 

Humerus,  fracture  of,  14,  17 

Hypostatic  pneumonia,  27,  88 

Hysteria,  125 

Iliac  dislocation,  44 
Immature  cataract,  131 
Incontinence,   103 
Indications,  3 
Infantile  paralysis,  109 
Infiltrations  of  soft  parts,  52 
Ischaemic  contracture,  20 

Joints,  sprained,  41 

Kneading,   15 
Knee,  sprained,  44 
Kypho-scoliosis,  68 
Kyphosis,  67 

Laryngitis,  catarrhal,  90 
Laryngological,  131 
Lightning  pains,  108 


Limping,  46 
Little's  disease,  108 
Locomotor  ataxia,  105 
Lumbago,  52 

Lungs,  massage  in  diseases  of, 
87 

Massage,  general,  101 
Massage  in  chorea,  123 
Massage  in  puerperiun,  130 
Massage  in  scoliosis,  57 
Massage  of  abdomen,  95 
Massage  of  uterus,  127 
Masseur's  palsy,  125 
Medical,  75 

Metacarpals,  fractures  of,  24 
Metatarsalgia,  122 
Metatarsals,  fractures  of,  39 
Muscular  rheumatism,  50 

Nerve  vibrations,  114 
Nervous   system,    diseases   of, 

104 

Neuralgia,  118 
Neurasthenia,  125 
Neuritis,  114 
Nipples,  massage  of,  129 

Obstetrical,  127 
Occipital  headache,  52 
Occupation  neuroses,  124 
Olecranon,    fracture  of,  20 
Operations  in  fractures,  11 
Ophthalmological,  130 
Organic  nerve  trouble,  105 
Osteo-arthritis,  47 
Otitis  media,  131 
Otological,  130 
Otosclerosis,  131 

Pain  in  fractures,  6,  7 
Paralysis  agitans,  122 
Paralytic  deformities,  72 
Patella,  fractures  of,  29 
Periostitic  nodes,  50 
Peripheral  nerve  lesions,  115 
Phalanges,  24 
Pharyngitis,  catarrhal,  90 
Pleuritic  adhesions,  90 
Podalgia,  122 


INDEX 


141 


Post-partum  haemorrhage,  127 
Pott's  fracture,  34 
Progressive  muscular  atrophy, 

108 

Prolapse,  of  uterus,  128 
Prostatorroea,  54 
Protracted  labour,  127 
Pubic  dislocation,  44 

Quadriceps,  massage  of,  28 

Radius,  fracture  of,  21 
Raynaud's  disease,  53 
References,  137 
Resisted  movements  in  chorea, 

124 

Respiratory  system,  87 
Resuscitation  of  the  new-born, 

127 

Retention,  103 
Rhinological,  131 
Rickets,  102 
Round  shoulders,  67 

Scaphoid,  fracture  of,  22 
Sciatica,  52,  121 
Scoliosis,  55 
Scrivener's  palsy,  124 
Shoulder,  sprained,  42 
Special,   127 

Speech  disturbances,   113 
Spinal  accessory,  116 
Spinal  jackets,  65 
Splints  in  fractures,  8 
Splints  in  paralysis,  109 


Sprained  joints,  41 
Sprained  muscles,  50 
Sprengel's  shoulder,   74 
Stomach,  dilatation  of,  93 
Strise  gravidarum,  129 
Stroking,  8 

Subcoracoid  dislocation,  43 
Supracondyloid  fracture,  19 

Tabes  dorsalis,  105 
Tabo-paralysis,  108 
Teno-synovitis,  48 
Thrombosis,   113 
Tibia,  fracture  of,  32 
Toes,  fractures  of,  40 
Tonsils,  exercises  in,  132 
Torticollis,  rheumatic,  52 
Torticollis       traumatic       con 
genital,  73 

Traumatic,  synovitis,  47 
Tuberosities,  fractures  of,  17 

Ulcers,  53 

Ulna,  fracture  of,  21 
Ununited  fractures,  12 
Urinary  system,  103 
Uterus,  massage  of,  127,  128 

Varicose  veins,  130 
Volkmann's  contracture,  19 

Wrist,  sprained,  43 
Writer's  cramp,   124 

X-rays  in  fractures,  10 


LONDON 
H.    K.    LEWIS,    136    GOWEB   STREET,    W.C. 


SELECTED    LIST 


OF 


NEW   AND   STANDARD    WORKS 


PUBLISHED    BY 


H.  K.  LEWIS  &  Co.  LTD., 

136  GOWER  STREET,  &  24  GOWER  PLACE, 

LONDON,  W.C. 

TELEGRAMS :  TELEPHONE: 

Publicavit,  Eusroad,  London.      (ESTABLISHED  1844).         Museum  1072. 


%*  For  full  list  of  works  on  Medicine  and  Surgery  published  by 
H.  K.  Lewis  &  Co.  Ltd.  see  complete  Catalogue,  post  free 
on  application. 


SIR  JAMES  MACKENZIE  DAVIDSON. 

Consulting   Medical    Officer  Roentgen    Ray    Department,     Foyal    London 

Ophthalmic  Hospital;  Consulting  Medical  Officer  X-Ray  Department, 

Charing  Cross  Hospital,  &c. 

[   OCALIZATION  BY  X-RAYS  AND  STEREOSCOPY. 

*-*        With  Stereoscopic  Plates  and  other  Illustrations,  royal  8vo. 
ys.  6d.  net.  [Just  published. 

EDMOND  DELORME. 

Medecin  Inspecteur  General  del'Armee,  &c. 

\A/AR  SURGERY.    Translated  by  HENRY  DE  MERIC,  Surgeon, 
In-patients,  French    Hospital  and  Dispensary,  London, 
&c.     With  Illustrations,  crown  8vo,  53.  net. 


E.  H.  KETTLE,  M.D.,  B.S. 

Assistant   Pathologist     St.    Mary's    Hospital;    and    Assistant  Lecturer   on 

Pathology,  St.  Mary's  Hospital  Medical  School ;  Formerly  Pathologist 

to  the  Cancer  Hospital,  Brompton. 

THE    PATHOLOGY    OF    TUMOURS. 

Demy  8vo,  with   126   Illustrations    (3    in    colours)    from 
original  drawings  and  photographs.     Demy  8vo.      los.  6d.  net. 

[Just  published. 

E.  M.  MAGILL,  M.B.,  B.S.  LOND.,  D.P.H.,  R.C.S.I.  (HONS.) 
1SJOTES  ON  GALVANISM   AND  FARADISM. 

With  67  Illustrations,  crown  8vo.,  48.  6d.  net. 

[Just  published. 

2000,  6 — 16.  I 


New  and  Standard  Works  published  by 

R.  W.  ALLEN,  M.D.,  B.S.  LOND. 

Late  Clinical  Pathologist  to  the  Mount  Vernon  Hospital  for  Diseases  of  the 
Chest,  Hampstead  ;  late  Pathologist  to  the  Royal  Eye  Hospital,  London. 

I. 

VACCINE     THERAPY,     ITS      THEORY      AND 

PRACTICE.      Fourth    Edition,   entirely   re-written   and 
greatly  enlarged,  with  additional  charts,  demy  8vo.  gs.  net. 


THE  BACTERIAL  DISEASES  OF   RESPIRATION, 

and  Vaccines  in  their  Treatment.     With  10  plates  and 
19  charts,  royal  8vo,  6s.  net. 


W.  E.  M.  ARMSTRONG,  M.A.,  M.D.  DUB. 

Bacteriologist  to  the  Central  London  Ophthalmic  Hospital,  &c. 

T     K.  THERAPY,  with  Special  Reference  to  Tuberculosis. 
Demy  8vo,  55.  net. 


NOEL  D.  BARDSWELL,  M.D. 

Medical  Superintendent,  King  Edward  VII  Sanatorium,  Midhurst. 

PRELIMINARY  REPORT  ON  THE  TREATMENT 
OF  PULMONARY  TUBERCULOSIS  WITH  TUBER- 
CULIN.    Prefatory  note  by  Professor  KARL  PEARSON,  F.R.S. 
With  22  Charts,  demy  8vo,  6s.  net. 


W.  M.  BEAUMONT. 

INJURIES    OF   THE    EYES   OF  THE    EMPLOYED, 
AND    THE    WORKMEN'S    COMPENSATION    ACT. 
Problems  in  Prognosis.     Crown  8vo,  55. 


REGINALD  R.  BENNETT,  B.SC.  LOND.,  F.I.C. 

Pharmaceutical  Chemist;  late  Pharmacist  and  Teacher  of  Pharmacy  to 
University  College  Hospital,  London,  &c. 

M ATERIA  MEDICA  AND  PHARMACY  FOR  MEDI- 
CAL STUDENTS.    With  an  appendix  on  Incompatibility. 
Third  Edition,  thoroughly  revised,  fcap.  8vo,  45.  6d.  net. 


JOHN  FAIRBAIRN   BINNIE,  A.M.,  G.M.  ABERD. 

Surgeon  to  the  General  Hospital,  Kansas  City,  Mo.,  &c. 

MANUAL  OF  OPERATIVE  SURGERY. 
Seventh   Edition,   revised   and  enlarged,  with   numerous 
illustrations,  royal  8vo,  323.  net.  [Just  ready. 

2 


&.  fe.  Lewis  &  Co.  Ltd.,  136  Gower  Street,  London. 
E.  M.  BROCKBANK,  M.D.  VICT.,  F.R.C.P. 

Senior  Honorary  Assistant  Physician  Royal  Infirmary,  Manchester,  &c. 
-THE  DIAGNOSIS  AND  TREATMENT  OF  HEART 
DISEASE.  Practical  Points  for  Students  and  Prac- 
titioners. Being  a  new  revised  and  enlarged  Edition  of  "  Heart 
Sounds  and  Murmurs,  their  Causation  and  Differentiation." 
With  22  Illustrations,  crown  8vo,  33.  6d.  net.  [Just  published. 


OLLIVER   BRUCE,  M.R.C.S.,  L.R.C.P., 

Joint  Tuberculosis  Officer  for  the  County  of  Essex. 

|  ECTURES  ON  TUBERCULOSIS  TO  NURSES. 
Aj  Based  on  a  Course  delivered  to  the  Queen  Victoria  Jubilee 
Nurses.  With  Illustrations,  crown  8vo,  2s.  6d.  net. 


W.  IRONSIDE  BRUCE,  M.D. 

Physician  to  the  X-Ray  and  Electrical  Departments,  Charing  Cross 
Hospital,  &c. 

A    SYSTEM  OF  RADIOGRAPHY  :  with  an  Atlas  of  the 
"•         Normal.     With  in  Illustrations,  folio,  155.  net. 


MILDRED  M.  BURGESS,  M.D.  LOND. 

Late  Assistant  House  Physician,  Victoria  Hospital   for  Sick  Children,  Hull; 

late   House  Surgeon,  Royal  Free  Hospital;  Assistant  School  Doctor,  London 

County  Council;    Medical  Officer,  London  County  Council,  Girls'  Industrial 

School,  Brixton  Hill,  S.W.,  &c. 

I. 
LJEALTH. 

With  2  coloured  Plates  and  other  Illustrations,  crown  8vo, 
stiff  paper  covers,  is.  6d.  net. 

ii. 

THE  CARE  OF  INFANTS  AND  YOUNG  CHILDREN 
1  IN  HEALTH.  Second  Edition,  reprinted,  crown  8vo, 
stiff  paper  covers,  is.  net. 


JOSEPH  BYRNE,  A.M.,  M.D.,  LLB. 

i 

AN  THE  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  THE  SEMICIRCULAR 
U  CANALS  AND  THEIR  RELATION  TO  SEASICK- 
NESS. Illustrated  with  diagrams,  tables  and  a  chart,  crown  8vo, 
I2s.  6d.  net. 

ii. 

EA-SICKNESS     AND      HEALTH.        A      Manual     for 
Travellers.     Crown  8vo,  45.  net. 


S 


New  and  Standard  Works  published  by 


ALFRED  H.  CARTER,  M.D.  LOND.,  F.R.C.P.,  J.P. 

Formerly  Professor  of  Medicine,  University  of  Birmingham ;  Late  Examiner 
in  Medicine  for  the  University  of  London ;    Consulting  Physician  to  the 
Queen's  Hospital,  Birmingham,  &c. 

ELEMENTS  OF  PRACTICAL    MEDICINE. 

"       Tenth  Edition,  revised  throughout,  crown  8vo,  gs.  net. 


F.  COLEMAN,  L.R.C.P.,  M.R.C.S.,  LD.S. 

Assistant    Dental    Surgeon,    St.    Bartholomew's    Hospital,   and    the   Royal 
Dental  Hospital. 

AND  HARVEY  MILLIARD,  LR.C.P. 

Anaesthetist  to  the  Royal  Dental  Hospital,  &c. 

ANESTHETICS  IN  DENTAL  SURGERY. 

"•         With  6  plates  and  38  illustrations  in  the  text,  crown  8vo, 

75.  net. 

F.  COLEMAN,  LR.C.P.,  M.R.C.S.,  LD.S. 

Assistant  Dental  Surgeon  to  St.  Bartholomew's  Hospital,  &c. 

CXTRACTION      OF     TEETH. 

*•*         Second     Edition,    with     57      Illustrations,     crown     8vo, 

33.  6d.  net. 


ARTHUR  COOPER,  M.R.C.S.,  LR.C.P. 

Consulting  Surgeon  to  the  Westminster  General  Dispensary,  &c. 

THE     SEXUAL     DISABILITIES     OF      MAN      AND 

1        THEIR  TREATMENT.      Third  Edition,  Enlarged,  with 
Illustrations,  crown  8vo.  [In  the  Press. 


CHARLES  COTAR,  M.D.  PARIS. 

Consulting  Physician  in  Vichy. 

THE  MINERAL  WATERS  OF  VICHY.     For  the  use  of 
General  Practitioners.      With  a  preface  by  Dr.  Vaughan 
Harley.     With  plans  and  illustrations,  post  8vo,  45.  net. 


H.  RADCLIFFE-CROCKER,  M.D.  LOND.,  B.S.,  F.R.C.P. 

Late  Physician  for  Diseases  of  the  Skin  in  University  College  Hospital. 

DISEASES  OF  THE  SKIN:  THEIR  DESCRIPTION, 
PATHOLOGY,     DIAGNOSIS,    AND    TREATMENT. 
Third    Edition,  with  76    Plates  and    112    Illustrations,    2    vols., 
large  8vo,  305.  net. 

4 


H.  K.  Lewis  &  Co.  Ltd.,  136  Gower  Street,  London. 
F.  G.  CROOKSHANK,  M.D. 

Physician  (Out-patients)  Hampstead  General  and  N.W.  London  Hospital. 
I. 

CSSAYS    AND    CLINICAL    STUDIES. 
^          Demy  8vo,  ys.  6d.  net. 

ii. 

FLATULENCE    AND    SHOCK. 

Demy  8vo,  2s.  net. 


T 


J.  SADLER  CURGENVEN,  M.R.C.S.,  LR.C.P. 

HE    CHILD'S    DIET. 

Second  Edition,  crown  8vo,  2s.  6d.  net. 


EDWARD  J.  EDWARDES,  M.D.  LOND. 

Member  of  the  Royal  College  of  Physicians,  London. 


A      CONCISE     HISTORY      OF      SMALL-POX      AND 

A         VACCINATION  IN  EUROPE.     Crown  8vo,  as.  6d.  net. 


MAX  EINHORN,  M.D. 

Professor  of  Medicine   at  the    New    York    Graduate   Medical    School    and 
Hospital,  &c. 

f  ECTURES     ON     DIETETICS. 
•Lj         With  4  plates,  post  8vo,  45.  net. 


W.    D'ESTE    EMERY,    M.D.,  B.SC.  LOND. 

Director  of  the  Laboratories  and  Lecturer  on  Pathology  and  Bacteriology, 
King's  College  Hospital,  and  Lecturer  on  General  Pathology,  London  School 
of  Medicine  for  Women  ;  formerly  Assistant  Bacteriologist  to  the  Laboratories 
of  the  Royal  Colleges  of  Physicians  and  Surgeons,  London  ;  and  sometime 
Lecturer  on  Pathology  and  Bacteriology  in  the  University  of  Birmingham,  &c. 

IMMUNITY  AND  SPECIFIC  THERAPY.     An  Account 
of  the  main    phenomena  of  Infection  and  Immunity,  and 
their  application  in  the  prevention,  diagnosis  and   treatment  of 
disease.     With  illustrations,  demy  8vo,  i2s.  6d.  net. 


E.  W.  GOODALL,  M.D.  LOND. 

Medical  Superintendent  of  the  Eastern  Hospital  of  the  Metropolitan  Asylums 
Board  ;  Formerly  Medical  Registrar  to  Guy's  Hospital; 

AND  J.  W.  WASHBOURN,  C.M.G.,  M.D.  LOND.,  F.R.C.P. 

Late  Physician  to  the  London  Fever  Hospital;  Assistant  Physician  to 
Guy's  Hospital,  and  Lecturer  in  the  Medical  School. 

A  MANUAL  OF  INFECTIOUS  DISEASES.  Second 
**  Edition,  revised  and  largely  rewritten  by  E.  W.  GOODALL, 
Illustrated  with  Plates,  Diagrams,  and  Charts,  8vo,  145.  net. 


New  and  Standard  Works  published  by 
ALFRED  GORDON,  A.M.  M.D.  PARIS. 

Associate  in  Nervous  and  Mental  Diseases,  Jefferson  Medical  College,  &c. 

niSEASES    OF    THE    NERVOUS  SYSTEM  :     for  the 

General  Practitioner  and  Student.      Second  Edition,  with 
69  Illustrations,  roy.  8vo,  175.  net. 


WILLIAM  GORDON,  M.A.,  M.D.,  F.R.C.P. 

Physician  to  the  Royal  Devon  and  Exeter  Hospital ;  Physician  to  the  West  of 
England  Eye  infirmary ;  sometime  Scholar  of  Trinity  College,  Cambridge. 

I. 

THE     INFLUENCE     OF     STRONG      PREVALENT 
RAIN-BEARING   WINDS   ON    THE    PREVALENCE 
OF  PHTHISIS.     With  22  maps,,  mostly  coloured,  demy  8vo, 
75.  6d.  net. 

ii. 

T<HE  PLACE  OF  CLIMATOLOGY  IN  MEDICINE: 
being  the  Samuel  Hyde  Memorial  Lectures  read  before  the 
Section  of  Balneology  and  Climatology  of  the  Royal  Society  of 
Medicine,  May  2Oth  and  2ist,  1913.  With  18  Tables,  demy  8vo, 
35.  6d.  net. 


GEORGE   M.  GOULD,  A.M.,   M.D. 

i. 
•THE    PRACTITIONER'S    MEDICAL    DICTIONARY, 

an  illustrated  dictionary  of  Medicine  and  allied  subjects, 
including  all  the  words  and  phrases  generally  used  in  Medicine, 
with  their  proper  pronunciation,  derivation,  and  definition. 
Third  Edition,  illustrated,  medium  8vo,  gilt  edges,  rounded 
corners,  bound  in  limp  leather,  i8s.  net.  [jfust  ready. 

II. 

A  POCKET  MEDICAL  DICTIONARY,  giving  the  Pro- 
"•  nunciation  and  Definition  of  the  Principal  Words  used  in 
Medicine  and  the  Collateral  Sciences.  Seventh  edition,  thoroughly 
revised,  containing  35,000  words.  Limp  leather,  32mo,  55.  net ; 
or  with  Thumb  Index,  6s.  6d.  net. 


G.  M.  GOULD  AND  W.  L  PYLE. 

DOCKET      CYCLOPEDIA      OF      MEDICINE      AND 

SURGERY.  Based  upon  the  Second  Edition  of  Gould 
and  Pyle's  Cyclopedia  of  Practical  Medicine  and  Surgery.  Second 
Edition,  revised,  enlarged  and  edited  by  R.  J.  E.  SCOTT,  M.A., 
B.C.L.,  M.D.,  New  York  ;  formerly  attending  Physician  to  the 
Demilt  Dispensary  ;  formerly  attending  Physician  to  the  Bellevue 
Dispensary.  736  pages,  limp  leather,  321110,  55.  net, 
6 


H.  K.  Lewis  &  Co.  Ltd.,  136  Qower  Street,  London. 
C.  GRAHAM  GRANT,  LR.C.P.  AND  S.  EDIN. 

Divisional  Surgeon  H.  and  Thames  Divisions  Metropolitan  Police. 
Surgeon  Poplar  Hospital,  &c. 

DRACTICAL      FORENSIC       MEDICINE,     A      Police- 
Surgeon's   Emergency   Guide.      Second   Edition,  revised 
and  enlarged,  fcap.  8vo,  2s.  net. 


DR.  RICHARD  GREEFF. 

Professor  of  Ophthalmology  in  the  University  of  Berlin  and  Chief  of  the 
Royal  Ophthalmic  Clinic  in  the  Charite  Hospital. 

ATLAS  OF  EXTERNAL  DISEASES  OF  THE  EYE, 
**  for  Physicians  and  Students.  Only  authorised  English 
Translation  by  P.  W.  SHEDD,  M.D.,  New  York.  With  84 
Illustrations  in  colour  on  54  plates,  demy  410,  425.  net. 


B.  BURNETT   HAM,  M.D.,  M.R.C.S.,  D.P.H. 

Late  Chief  Health  Officer  for  Victoria,  Australia.     Late  Commissioner  of 
Public  Health  for  Queensland. 

A  HANDBOOK  OF  SANITARY  LAW,  for  the  use 
"•  of  Candidates  for  Public  Health  Qualifications,  Seventh 
Edition,  fcap  8vo,  35.  6d.  net. 


J.  DELPRATT   HARRIS,  M.D.  (DURH.),  M.R.C.S. 

Senior  Surgeon  and  Hon.  Medical  Officer  in  charge  of  Electrical  Department, 
Royal  Devon  and  Exeter  Hospital,  etc. 

I  ECTURES  ON  MEDICAL  ELECTRICITY  TO 
"  NURSES.  An  Illustrated  Manual.  With  23  Illustrations. 
Crown  8vo,  2s.  6d.  net. 


ALFRED  M.  HELLMAN.  B.A.,  M.D. 

ding  Gynecologist  and  Obstetrician,   Lebai 
7ellow  New  York  Academy  of  Medicine,  &c 

AMNESIA    AND    ANALGESIA  IN  PARTURITION 
**         (TWILIGHT  SLEEP).     Crown  8vo,  6s.  6d.  net. 


Adjunct  attending  Gynecologist  and  Obstetrician,   Lebanon  Hospital; 
Fellow  New  York  Academy  of  Medicine,  &c. 


F.    HERNAMAN-JOHNSON,    M.D. 

'HE  LOCALIZATION  OF  BULLETS  AND  SHELL 
FRAGMENTS.     With   Illustrations   demy  8vq,  is.  net, 

7 


New  and  Standard  Works  published  by 
H.  LEWIS  JONES,  M.A.,  M.D.,  F.R.C.P. 

Late  Consulting  Medical   Officer  to  the  Electrical  Department  in   St.  Bar- 
tholomew's Hospital;  Honorary  Fellow  of  the  American  Electro-Therapeutic 
Association  ;  Member  of  the  Societe  Francais  d'Electro-Therapie  et  de 
Radiologie.  &c. 

TONIC  MEDICATION:  THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  THE  METHOD, 

AND    AN    ACCOUNT    OF    THE    CLINICAL    RESULTS    OBTAINED. 

Second  Edition,  with  coloured  Frontispiece.    Crown  8vo,  53.  net. 


EMILIA  KANTHACK. 

(MRS.  DE  VOSS.) 

THE  PRESERVATION  OF  INFANT  LIFE.     A  guide 

for  health  visitors.     With  Preface  by  Dr.  J.  F.  J.   SYKES, 

Late  Medical  Officer  of  Health,  St.  Pancras.    Crown  8vo,  is.  net. 


H.  R.  KENWOOD,  M.B.,  D.P.H.,  F.C.S. 

Temporary  Lieut. -Col.  R.A.M.C.;  Professor  of  Hygiene  and  Public  Health 
in  the  University  of  London,  &c. 

LJEALTH     IN     THE     CAMP.        A     Talk     to     Soldiers. 
Demy  i6mo.  $d.  net. 


PROF.   FEDOR   KRAUSE,  M.D. 

Geh.  Medizinalrat  Dirigierender  Artzt  am  Augusta-Hospital  zu  Berlin. 

CURGERY  OF   THE  BRAIN    AND    SPINAL    CORD, 
^         based  on  personal  experiences.     Translated  by  Prof.  H.  A. 
HAUBOLD,  M.D.,  Clinical  Professor  of  Surgery,  Bellevue  Hospital 
and  New  York  University  Medical  College. 
Vol.  I.     With   63   figures   in  the  Text,  24  coloured  plates,  and  i 

half-tone  plate.     Crown  410,  25*.  net. 
Vol.  II.     With  94  figures  in  the  Text  (14  coloured)  27  coloured 

figures  and  4  half-tone  figs,  on  15  plates.     Crown  410,  305.  net. 
Vol.  III.    With  42  figures  (3  coloured)  in  the  text,  and  47  coloured 

figures  on  22  plates.     Crown  410,  303.  net. 


DAVID  BRIDGE    LEES,  M.D.,  CANTAB.,  F.R.C.P.,  LOND. 

Late  Consulting  Physician  to  St.  Mary's  Hospital  and  to  the    Hospital   for 
Sick  Children,  Great  Ormond  Street,  London. 

f|N  THE  DIAGNOSIS  AND  TREATMENT  OF 
u  INCIPIENT  PULMONARY  TUBERCULOSIS.  The 
Bradshaw  Lectures  delivered  before  the  Royal  College  of  Physi- 
cians of  London.  With  appendices,  demy  8vo,  55.  net. 


DR.  PERCY  LEWIS. 

Hon.  Medical  Officer  to  the  Victoria  Hospital  and   Surgeon  to  St.  Andrews 
Convalescent  Home,  Folkestone. 

A    MANUAL  OF  MEDICAL  EXERCISES. 
**•         2nd  edition,  i6mo,  enlarged,  is.  6d.  net. 

8 


H.K.  Lewis  &  Co.  Ltd.,  136  Qower  Street,  London. 
LEWIS'S   PRACTICAL   SERIES. 

In  Demy  and  Crown  8vo  Volumes,  with  Illustrations. 

THE     OPERATIONS     OP    AURAL    SURGERY.      By    C.    E. 

WEST,  F.R.C.S..  Aural  Surgeon,  St.  Bartholomew's  Hospital,  and 
SYDNEY  SCOTT,  M.S.,  F.R.C.S.,  Assistant  Aural  Surgeon,  St. 
Bartholomew's  Hospital,  &c.  With  Illustrations,  demy  8vo,  ys.  6d.  net. 

MIND  AND  ITS  DISORDERS.  A  Textbook  for  Students 
and  Practitioners.  By  W.  H.  B.  STODDART,  M.D.,  F.R.C.P., 
Lecturer  on  Mental  Diseases,  St.  Thomas's  Hospital,  &c.  Second 
Edition,  123.  6d.  net. 

CLINICAL  BACTERIOLOGY  AND  H-ffiM ATOLOG V  FOR 
PRACTITIONERS.  By  W.  D'ESTK  EMERY,  M.D.,  B.Sc.  LOND., 
Clinical  Pathologist  to  King's  College  Hospital,  &c.  Fifth  Edition. 

[In  preparation. 

DISEASES    OF    THE    NERVOUS   SYSTEM.     A  Handbook 

for  Students  and  Practitioners.  By  C.  E.  BEEVOR,  M.D.  Lond., 
F.R.C.P.,  Physician  to  the  National  Hospital  for  the  Paralysed  and 
Epileptic.  IDS.  6d. 

THE  TREATMENT  OF  PULMONARY  CONSUMPTION. 
By  VINCENT  D.  HARRIS,  M.D.  Lond.,  F.R.C.P.,  and  E.  CLIFFORD 
BEALE,  M.A.,  M.B.,  Cantab.,  F.R.C.P.,  Physicians  to  the  City  of  London 
Hospital  for  Diseases  of  the  Chest,  &c.  xos.  6d. 

THE  SURGICAL  DISEASES  OF  CHILDREN  AND  THEIR 
TREATMENT  BY  MODERN  METHODS.  By  D'ARCY  POWER, 
F.R.C.S.,  Surgeon  to  St.  Bartholomew's  Hospital.  IDS.  6d. 

DISEASES  OF  THE  NOSE  &  THROAT.  By  HERBERT 
TILLKY,  M.D.,  B.S.  Lond.,  F.R.C.S.  Eng.,  Surgeon  to  the  Ear  and 
Throat  Department,  University  College  Hospital.  Third  Edition,  145.  net. 

PUBLIC  HEALTH  LABORATORY  WORK.  By  H.  R. 
KENWOOD,  M.B.,  D.P.H.,  F.C.S.,  Chadwick  Professor  of  Hygiene  and 
Public  Health,  London  University,  &c.  Sixth  Edition,  IDS.  net. 

MEDICAL  MICROSCOPY.  By  FRANK  J.  WETHERED. 
M.D.,  M.R.C.P.,  Medical  Registrar  to  the  Middlesex  Hospital,  gs. 

MEDICAL  ELECTRICITY.  By  H.  LEWIS  JONES,  M.A. 
M.D.,F.R.C.P.,  late  Consulting  Medical  Officer,  Electrical  Department, 
St.  Bartholomew's  Hospital.  Sixth  Edition,  thoroughly  revised,  demy 
8vo,  i2S.  6d.  net. 

HYGIENE  AND  PUBLIC  HEALTH.  By  LOUIS  PARKES, 
M.D.,  D.P.H.  Lond.  Univ.,  Lecturer  on  Public  Health  at  St.  George's 
Hospital-,  and  H.  R.  KENWOOD,  M.B.,  D.P.H. ,  F.C.S.  Fifth 
Edition,  izs.  6d.  net. 

MANUAL  OF  OPHTHALMIC  PRACTICE,  By  C.  HIGGENS, 
F.R.C.S.,  Lecturer  on  Ophthalmology  at  Guy's  Hospital  Medical  School, 
&c.  Second  Edition,  75.  6d. 

A  PRACTICAL  TEXTBOOK  OF  THE  DISEASES  OF 
WOMEN.  By  ARTHUR  H.  N.  LEWERS,  M.D.  Lond.,  F.R.C.P. 
Lond. .Consulting  Obstetric  Physician, London  Hospital.  Seventh  Edition, 
with  Coloured  Plates  and  new  Illustrations,  12s.  6d.  net. 

ANAESTHETICS:  their  Uses  and  Administration.  By 
DUDLEY  W.  BUXTON,  M.D.,  B.S.,  M.R.C.P.,  Administrator  of 
Anaesthetics  at  University  College  Hospital,  &c.  Fifth  Edition,  with 
8  Plates  and  84  Illustrations,  IDS.  6d.  net. 

A  PRACTICAL  TREATISE  ON  DISEASES  OF  THE  KID- 
NEYS AND  URINARY  DERANGEMENTS.  By  C.  H.  RALFE.M.A., 
M.D.Cantab.,  F.R.C.P.,  Physician  to  the  London  Hospital.  IDS.  6d. 

DENTAL  SURGERY  FOR  MEDICAL  PRACTITIONERS 
AND  STUDENTS  OF  MEDICINE.  By  ASHLEY  W.  BARRETT 
M.B.  Lond.,  M.R.C.S.,  L.D.S.,  Consulting  Dental  Surgeon  to  the  Lon- 
don Hospital.  Fifth  Edition.  [In  preparation 

9 


New  and  Standard  Works  published  by 


G.  ROE  LOCKWOOD,  M.D. 

Professor  of  Clinical  Medicine  in  the  Columbia  University. 

niSEASES  OF  THE  STOMACH,  including  Dietetic  and 
*"*  Medicinal  Treatment.  With  15  Plates  and  126  Engravings, 
medium  8vo,  255.  net. 


J.  M.  H.  MACLEOD,  MA,  M.D.,  M.R.C.P. 

Physician  for  Diseases  of  the  Skin,  Charing  Cross  Hospital;  Physician  for 

Diseases  of  the  Skin,  Victoria  Hospital  for  Children  ;  Lecturer  on  Skin 

Diseases,  London  School  of  Tropical  Medicine. 

PRACTICAL  HANDBOOK  OF  THE  PATHOLOGY 

OF  THE  SKIN.  An  Introduction  to  the  Histology, 
Pathology,  and  Bacteriology  of  the  Skin,  with  special  refeience 
to  TECHNIQUE.  With  40  Plates  (8  being  in  colours),  from 
original  Drawings,  demy  8vo,  155.  net. 


W.  HARRISON  MARTINDALE,  PH.D.;  F.0,8. 
AND  W.  WYNN  WESTCOTT,  M.B.  LOND.,  D.P.H. 

H.M.'s  Coroner  for  North-East  London. 
THE    EXTRA    PHARMACOPOEIA. 

Being  the  Sixteenth  Edition  of  MARTINDALE  and  WEST- 
COTT'S  "  Extra  Pharmacopoeia,"  2  vols.,  fcap.  8vo,  2is.  net. 
Also  sold  separately,  Vol.  I.,  145.  net,  Vol.  II.,  75.  net. 


G.  M.  MAYBERRY,  B.A.,  LR.C.P. 

Resident  Medical  Officer,  Dagenham  Sanatorium,  Essex,  &c. 
C  ANATORIUM  CASE.  REGISTER.  The  Register  Sheet 
measures  23  ins.  by  n  in.  The  Registers  are  supplied 
strongly  bound,  with  Index,  in  books  of  50,  100,  150  or  200 
Forms.  The  name  of  the  Sanatorium  can  be  added  on  the  side 
if  required.  Book  of  50  forms,  bound  Half  Black  Basil,  Marbled 
Edges,  Index  two  letters  to  a  page,  folioed,  £1  53. ;  book  of 
100  forms,  bound  as  above,  £i  los. ;  book  of  150  forms,  bound 
as  above,  £i  153.  ;  book  of  200  forms,  bound  as  above,  £*. 


CHARLES  A.   MERCIER,  M.D.,   F.R.C.P. 

TEPER    HOUSES    AND   MEDIAEVAL    HOSPITALS, 
being  the  Fitzpatrick  Lectures  delivered  before  the  Royal 
College  of  Physicians,  London.     Royal  8vo,  is.  net. 


C.  K1LLICK  MILLARD,  M.D.,  D.SC. 

Medical  Officer  of  Health  for  Leicester,  &c. 

THE   VACCINATION    QUESTION  IN  THE  LIGHT 
OF    MODERN    EXPERIENCE.      An  Appeal  for  Recon- 
sideration.   With  10  plates  and  4  diagrams,  demy  8vo,  6s.  net. 


H.  K.  Lewis  &  Co.  Ltd.,  136  Gower  Street,  London 


A.  STANFORD  MORTON,  M.B.,  F.R.C.S.  ENG. 

Surgeon  to  the  Moorfields  Ophthalmic  Hospital ;   Ophthalmic  Surgeon  to  the 
Great  Northern  Central  Hospital,  &c. 

DEFRACTION    OF    THE    EYE;    its   Diagnosis  and   the 
Correction  of  its  Errors.      Seventh   Edition,  thoroughly 
revised,  small  8vo,  35.  6d. 


C.  W.  MANSELL  MOULLIN,  M.A.,  M.D.  OXON.,  F.R.C.S.  ENG. 

Surgeon  and  Lecturer  on  Physiology  at  the  London  Hospital,  &c. 

I. 

THE    BRADSHAW  LECTURE   ON   THE   BIOLOGY 
OF  TUMOURS.     Demy  Svo,  2s.  net. 

n. 
THE    ENLARGEMENT    OF    THE    PROSTATE,    Its 

Treatment  and  Radical  Cure.     Fourth  Edition,  Svo.  6s. 


WILLIAM  MURRAY,  M.D.,  F.R.C.P.  LOND. 

DOUGH     NOTES     ON     REMEDIES.       Sixth    Edition, 
with  new  matter,  crown  8vo,  45.  net. 


WILLIAM  MURRELL,  M.D.,  F.R.C.P. 

Late  Senior  Physician  to  Westminster  Hospital,  &c. 

U/HAT  TO  DO  IN  CASES  OF  POISONING. 

Eleventh  edition,  thoroughly  revised,  roy.  32010,  35.  net. 


G.  OLIVER,  M.D.,  F.R.C.P. 

CTUDIES  IN  BLOOD  PRESSURE  :  PHYSIO- 
°  LOGICAL  AND  CLINICAL.  Third  Edition,  revised 
and  enlarged.  Edited  by  W.  D.  HALLIBURTON,  M.D.  Demy 
Svo,  75.  6d.  net.  {$***  out- 


SIR  THOMAS  OLIVER,  M.D.,  F.R.C.P. 

Consulting  Physician  Royal  Victoria  Infirmary,  and  Professor  of  the  Principle! 
and  Practice  of  Medicine,  University  of  Durham  College  of  Medicine,  New- 
castle-upon-Tyne. 

T  BAD     POISONING,    from    the   Industrial,    Medical,    and 

^         Social  points  of  view.     Lectures  delivered   at  the  Royal 

Institute  of  Public  Health.     Crown  Svo,  with  illustrations,  55. net. 

II 


New  and  Standard  Works  published  by 


SIR  WILLIAM  OSLER,  BART.,  M.D.,  F.R.C.P.  LOND. 

Regius  Professor  of  Medicine,  University  of  Oxford. 

A  EQUANIMITAS  :     With    other    Essays    and  Addresses  to 
Medical  Students,  Nurses  and   Practitioners  of  Medicine. 
Third  Impression  of  Second  Edition.     Post  8vo,  6s.  net. 


KURRE  W.  OSTROM. 

Instructor  in  Massage  and  Swedish  Movements  in  the  Philadelphia  Polyclinic 
and  College  for  Graduates  in  Medicine. 

MASSAGE  AND  THE  ORIGINAL  SWEDISH 
1T1  MOVEMENTS;  their  application  to  various  diseases  of 
the  body.  Seventh  Edition,  with  115  illustrations,  crown  8vo, 
35.  6d.  net. 


STEPHEN   PAGET,  F.R.C.S. 

Senior    Secretary,    Surgical    Section,    Royal    Society   of    Medicine       Hon. 
Secretary,  Research  Defence  Society,  &c. 

TOR    AND     AGAINST    EXPERIMENTS     ON    ANI- 
MALS.      Evidence    before    the    Royal    Commission     on 
Vivisection.     With  an  Introduction  by  the  Ris;ht  Hon.  the  EARL 
OF  CROMER,  O.M.,  G.C.M.G.,  G.C.B.     Crown  8vo,  35.  6d.  net. 


LLEWELLYN    POWELL    PHILLIPS,    M.A.,  M.D.    (Cantab.), 
F.R.C.P.  (Lond.),  F.R.C.S   (Eng.) 

Professor  of  Medicine  in  the  Egyptian  Government  School  of  Medicine 
Cairo,     &c. 

AM02BIASIS   AND   THE   DYSENTERIES. 
-"•         Demy  8vo,  6s.  6d.  net. 


SIR  RICHARD  DOUGLAS  POWELL,  BART.,  M.D.  LOND.,  F.R.C.P. 

Physician  In  Ordinary  to  H.M.  the  King;  Consulting  Physician  to  the 
Middlesex  Hospital,  &c. 

AND  P.  HORTON-SMITH  HARTLEY,  C.V.O.,  M.A.,  M.D.  CANTAB. 
F.R.C.P. 

Physician  to  Out-patients,  St.  Bartholomew's  Hospital;  Physician  to  the 
Brompton  Hospital,  &c. 

HN    DISEASES    OF    THE    LUNGS    AND    PLEURA 
U      INCLUDING  TUBERCULOSIS   AND  MEDIASTINAL 
GROWTHS.     Fifth    Edition,  with    2g   plates  (6  coloured)  and 
other  illustrations  in  the  text,  8vo,  2  is.  net. 
12 


H.  K.  Lewis  &  Co.  Ltd.,  136  Qower  Street,  London. 
LOUIS  BATHE  BAWLING,  M.B.,  B.C.  CANTAB.,  F.R.C.S.  ENG. 

Surgeon,  with   charge  of  Out-Patients,  and  Demonstrator  of  Practical  and 

Operative   Surgery,  St.  Bartholomew's  Hospital;    late   Senior   Demonstrator 

of  Anatomy  and  Assistant  Surgeon  to  the  German  Hospital,  Dalston. 

T  ANDMARKS  AND  SURFACE  MARKINGS  OF  THE 
«  HUMAN  BODY.  Fifth  Edition,  demy  8vo,  29  plates 
(mostly  in  colour),  55.  net* 


FREDERICK  T.  ROBERTS,  M.D.,  B.SC.,  F.R.C.P. 

Emeritus  Professor  of  Medicine  and  Clinical  Medicine  in  University  College, 
Consulting  Physician  to  University  College  Hospital,  &c. 

"THE    THEORY    AND    PRACTICE    OF    MEDICINE. 
Tenth  Edition,  with  Appendix,  in  i  volume,  with  Illustra- 
tions, large  8vo,  125.  6d.  net. 


CHARLES  RUSS,  M.B.,  M.R.C.S.,  LR.C.P. 

Physician  in  Charge  Electro-Therapeutic  Department,  Male  Lock 
Hospital,  London. 

A  NEW  TREATMENT  FOR  GONORRHOEA. 

Demy  8vo.,  35.  net.  [Just  published. 


A.  H.  RUTHERFORD,  M.D.,  M.B.,  C.M.,  EDIN. 

THE     ILEO-C^CAL     VALVE.        Based  upon   a   Thesis 
submitted   for  the   Degree  of  Doctor  of  Medicine  of  the 
University    of     Edinburgh.       With     3     Coloured     Plates     and 
20  Half-tone  Plates,  comprising  37  figures,  demy  8vo,  6s.  net. 


T.  B.  SCOTT,  M.R.C.S.,  L.R.C.P. 

i. 


THE       ROAD       TO       A       HEALTHY      OLD       AGE. 

Essays  Lay  and  Medical.     Fcap  8vo,  2s.  6d.  net. 


MODERN      MEDICINE      AND  SOME      MODERN 
REMEDIES.      Practical  Notes  for  the  General  Practi- 
tioner.    Crown  8vo.,  45.  6d.  net.  [Jusl  published. 

13 


New  and  Standard  Works  published  by 
G.  E.  SHUTTLEWORTH,.  B.A.,  M.D. 

Special  Schools  Medical  Officer,  Willesden  Education  Committee  and 
formerly  to  the   School  Board  for  London,  &c. 

AND  W.  A.  POTTS,  M.A.,  M.D. 

Medical  Officer  to  the  Birmingham  Committee  for  the  Care  of  the  Mentally 
Defective,  &c. 

MENTALLY-DEFICIENT    CHILDREN:    their  Treat- 

ment  and   Training.     Fourth   Edition,   with   Plates  and 

Illustrations,  crown  8vo,  75.  6d.  net.  [Just  published. 

LOUIS  STARR,  M.D. 

Physician  to  the  Children's  Hospital,  Philadelphia,  &c. 

I. 

LTYGIENE  OF  THE  NURSERY.     Including  the  General 

Regimen  and  Feeding  of  Infants  and  Children  ;   Massage, 

and  the  Domestic  Management  of  the  Ordinary  Emergencies  of 

Early  Life.  Eighth  Edition,  with  Illustrations,  cr.  8vo,3S.  6d.  net. 

ii. 

T'HE     ADOLESCENT    PERIOD:   its  Features  and  Man- 

agement.      Intended  for  the  Teacher  and  Parent  as  well  as 

the  Practitioner.     Post  8vo,  45.  6d.  net.  [Just  published. 

W.  MITCHELL  STEVENS,  M.D.,  M.R.C.P. 

Fellow  of  University   College,  London;     University    Scholar    in    Medicine 

(London);  Senior  Physician  to  the  King  Edward   VII  Hospital,  Cardiff  ; 

Consulting   Physician  to  the  Royal  Hamadryad  Seamen's  Hospital ; 

Lecturer  in  Pharmacology  in  University  College,  Cardiff. 

MEDICAL     DIAGNOSIS. 

*"*         Medium  8vo,  with  177  illustrations,  several  in    colours 
including  a  coloured  plate,  155.  net. 


E.  R.  STITT,  A.M.,  PH.G.,  M.D. 

Inspector  U.S.  Navy;  Graduate  London  School  of  Tropical  Medicine,  &c. 
I. 

PRACTICAL     BACTERIOLOGY,     BLOOD     WORK, 

and  Animal  Parasitology,  &c.     Third    Edition,   4   Plates 
and  106  Illustrations,  post  8vo,  6s.  6d.  net. 

n. 

THE      DIAGNOSTICS      AND      TREATMENT      OF 
TROPICAL   DISEASES.     With   numerous   Illustra- 
tions, post  8vo,  8s.  net. 

SIR  J.  BLAND-SUTTON,  F.R.C.S. 

Assistant  Surgeon  to  the  Middlesex  Hospital. 

I  IGAMENTS:     THEIR    NATURE    AND   MORPHO- 
*-*         LOGY.     Third  Edition,  wood  engravings,  post  8vo,  45.  6d. 


&.  k.  Lewis  &  Co.  Ltd.,  136  Gower  Street,  London. 
LOUIS  WERNER,  M.B.,  F.R.C.S.I.,  SEN.  MOD.  UNIV.  DUB. 

Ophthalmic   Surgeon,    Mater    Hospital,    Dublin,    &c. 

CWANZY'S    HANDBOOK    OF    THE    DISEASES    OF 
THE  EYE  AND  THEIR  TREATMENT.    Eleventh  Edi- 
tion, with    261   Illustrations   and  9  Coloured   Plates,  demy  8vo, 
las.  6d.  net. 

G.  DE  SWIETOCHOWSKI,  M.D.,  M.R.C.S. 

Fellow  of  the   Royal  Society  of  Medicine;    Clinical  Assistant,  Electrical  and 
Massage  Department,  King's  College  Hospital. 

MECHANO-THERAPEUTICS  IN  GENERAL  PRAC- 
TICE.    With  31  Illustrations,  crown  8vo,  45.  net. 

ALBERT  TAYLOR. 

Member  Royal  Sanitary  Institute;  Sanitary  Inspector,  City  of  Westminster. 
THE    SANITARY    INSPECTOR'S   HANDBOOK. 
Fifth  Edition,  with  Illustrations,  cr.  8vo,  6s.  net. 


HUGrTHURSFIELD,  M.D.,  F.R.C.P. 

Senior  Demonstrator  of  Medical    Pathology,  St.    Bartholomew's    Hospital; 

Assistant  Physician  to  the  Hospital  for  Sick  Children,  Great  Ormond 

Street,  &c. 

AND  WILLIAM    P.  S.  BRANSON,  M.D.,  M.R.C.P. 

Junior    Curator    of   the    Museum,   St.    Bartholomew's   Hospital;    Assistant 
Physician  to  the  Royal  Free  Hospital,  &c. 

MEDICAL     MORBID     ANATOMY      AND      PATHO- 
LOGY.    Crown  8vo,  6s.  net. 


R.  PROSSER  WHITE,  M.D.  EDIN.,  M.R.C.S.  ENG. 

Life  Vice-President  and  Honorary  Medical  Officer,  Royal  Albert 
Edward  Infirmary,  Wigan. 

PATARRHAL      FEVERS,'    COMMONLY      CALLED 
^         COLDS  :  their  Causes,  Consequences,  Control,  and  Cure. 
With  3  plates,  extra  demy  8vo,  45. 
n. 

nCCUPATIONAL  AFFECTIONS  OF  THE  SKIN. 
^  A  brief  account  of  the  trade  processes  and  agents  which 
give  rise  to  them.  With  3  Plates,  demy  8vo,  75.  6d.  net. 

JOHN    WYLLIE,  M.D.   GLASGOW. 

^ENINGITIS,    SINUS     THROMBOSIS     AND    AB- 

M         SCESS  OF  THE  BRAIN.     Post  8vo,  6s.  6d.  net. 


MEREDITH  YOUNG,  M.D.,  D.P.H.,  D.S.SC., 

Of  Lincoln's  Inn,  Barrister-at-Law,  Chief  School  Medical  Officer,  Cheshire 

Educational  Committee,  &c. 

THE     MENTALLY     DEFECTIVE     CHILD. 
With  Illustrations.     Crown  8vo,  35.  6d.  net. 

[Just  published. 


Lewis's  Publications. 


All  Charts  sent  post  free.    Specimen  of  any  Chart  free. 

T  EWIS'S  DIET  CHARTS.    A  Suggestive  set  of  Diet  Tables  for 
*^         the  use  of  Physicians,  for  handing  to  Patients  after  Con- 
sultation,  modified  to  suit   Individual    Requirements;    for 
Albuminuria,  Anaemia  and  Debility,  Constipation,  Diabetes, 
Diarrhoea,  Dyspepsia,  Eczema,  Fevers,  Gall  Stones,  Gout 
and   Gravel,  Heart  Disease  (chronic),  Nervous  Diseases, 
Obesity,  Phthisis,  Rheumatism  (chronic);  and  Blank  Chart 
for  other  diseases.     58.  per  packet  of  100  charts,  post  free. 
A  special  leaflet  on  the  Diet  and  Management  of  Infants  is 
sold  separately.     12,  is. ;  100,  js.  6d.,  post  free. 

PHART  FOR  RECORDING  THE  EXAMINATION  OF  URINE. 

Designed  for  the  use  of  medical  men,  analysts  and  others 
making  examinations  of  the  urine  of  patients.  12,  is.  ; 
100,  6s.  6d.;  250,  145.;  500,  255.;  1000,  405. 

PLINICAL  CHARTS  FOR  TEMPERATURE  OBSERVATIONS,  ETC. 
^         Arranged  by  W.   RIGDEN,  M.R.C.S.    12,  is. ;  100,  6s.  6d. ; 
250,  145. ;  500,  255. ;  1000,  405. 

T  EWIS'S   H/EMATOLOGICAL  CHART.     A  new  Chart  designed 

*-*         for  recording  Counts,  &c.,  designed  by  Dr.  E.  R.  TURTON. 

1000,  405. ;  500,  255.;  250,  145.;  100,  6s.  6d.;  12,  is. 

I  EWIS'S  CLINICAL  CHART,  SPECIALLY   DESIGNED  FOR  USE 
"         WITH  THE  VISITING  LIST.   Arranged  for  four  weeks, 

and  measures  6x3  inches.     12,  6d.;  25,  is.;  100,  2s.  6d. ; 

500,  us.  6d. ;  1000,  2os. 

I  EWIS'S  "HANDY"  TEMPERATURE  CHART. 

L'  Arranged  for  three  weeks,  with  space  for  notes  of  case  as 
to  diet,  &c.,  and  ruled  on  back  for  recording  observations 
on  urine.  20,  is. ;  50,  2s. ;  100,  35.  6d. ;  500,  145. ;  1000,  255. 

Uniform  in  price  with  the  "  Handy  "  Chart : — 
T  EWIS'S  FOUR-HOUR  TEMPERATURE  CHART. 
^         Each  chart  will  last  a  week. 

LEWIS'S  NURSING  CHART.     Printed  on  both  sides. 
LEWIS'S  BLOOD-PRESSURE  AND  PULSE  CHART. 

T  EWIS'S  SMALL  FOUR-HOUR  TEMPERATURE  CHART. 
^         Designed    by  G.  C.   COLES,  M.R.C.S.     For   two   weeks, 
giving  space  for  Pulse,  Respiration,  Urine,  and  Remarks. 

[  EWIS'S  MORNING  AND  EVENING  TEMPERATURE  CHART. 

J-*  Designed  by  G.  C.  COLES,  M.R.C.S.  Each  chart  lasts 
three  weeks,  and  provides  space  for  noting  also  the  Pulse, 
Respiration,  and  Urine,  and  general  Remarks. 

T  EWIS'S  POCKET  CASE  BOOK. 

-L"  For  the  use  of  Nurses,  Students  and  Practitioners, 
25  cases,  4  pp.  to  each  case,  with  headings,  diagrams,  and 
a  temperature  chart.  Oblong  8vo,  8  in.  X  5  in., 
is.  6d.  net,  post  free,  is.  gd. 

H.  K.  Lewis  &•  Co.  Ltd.,  136  Gower  Street  and  24  Gower  Place,  London,  W.C, 


05 


ca 

8 
•§ 

O 

-Pi 


o 


University  of  Toron 
Library 


DO  NOT 

REMOVE 

THE 

CARD 

FROM 

THIS 

POCKET 


Acme  Library  Card  Pocket 

Unuet  Pat.  -Re/.  Indei  File 
Made  by  LIBRARY  BUREAU